Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation...

302
Industrial IT 800xA - System System Version 4.1 Installation

Transcript of Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation...

Page 1: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

IndustrialIT800xA - SystemSystem Version 4.1

Installation

Page 2: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...
Page 3: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

IndustrialIT800xA - SystemSystem Version 4.1

Installation

Page 4: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

NOTICEThe information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not beconstrued as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors thatmay appear in this document.

In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequentialdamages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB beliable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hard-ware described in this document.

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written per-mission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor usedfor any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license andmay be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in LowVoltage Directive 72/23/EEC.

Copyright © 2003-2005 by ABB. All rights reserved. Release: June 2005Document number: 3BSE034678R4101

TRADEMARKSAll rights to trademarks reside with their respective owners.

Page 5: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

About This BookGeneral ............................................................................................................................17

New Installations .............................................................................................................18

Upgrades..........................................................................................................................19

System Installer ...............................................................................................................19

Intended User...................................................................................................................19

Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons ....................................................19

Document Conventions ...................................................................................................20

Version Numbers in Screen Captures ..............................................................................21

Applicable Specifications ................................................................................................21

Related Documents..........................................................................................................21

Section 1 - Installation PlanningIntroduction .....................................................................................................................23

System Checker ...............................................................................................................23

New Installations .............................................................................................................23

Hardware Requirements ..................................................................................................24

Hot Fixes..........................................................................................................................24

Upgrades..........................................................................................................................24

How to Proceed for New Installations.............................................................................24

Planning and Preparation.................................................................................................26

System Overview.............................................................................................................28

Node Types...........................................................................................................28

Basic Node Types................................................................................30

Combined Node Types ........................................................................32

Page 6: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

6 3BSE034678R4101

Configuration Rules ............................................................................................. 33

Generic Configuration Rules .............................................................. 33

Domains Versus Workgroups.............................................................. 34

Windows XP Professional Versus Windows Server (2000 or 2003) .. 35

Optimized System Configurations...................................................... 35

Engineering Systems........................................................................... 36

System Configurations .................................................................................................... 36

Section 2 - General Installation ProceduresIntroduction ..................................................................................................................... 53

800xA Installation Wizard .............................................................................................. 54

Installation Sequence ...................................................................................................... 55

Licensing and Post Installation ....................................................................................... 60

Section 3 - Installing PrerequisitesIntroduction ..................................................................................................................... 61

Windows Operating System ............................................................................................ 62

Selecting the Windows Operating System........................................................... 62

Considerations for Disks and File System........................................................... 62

Disks ...................................................................................... 63

Fragmentation ..................................................................................... 63

File System ...................................................................................... 63

Windows Installation Guidelines ......................................................................... 63

Miscellaneous Windows Setup ............................................................................ 66

Configuration of Virtual Memory....................................................... 66

Miscellaneous Windows Settings ....................................................... 66

Disable Energy Saver and Screen Saver ............................................. 67

Disable Windows Firewall .................................................................. 67

Disable Web Browser Popup Blocker................................................. 67

Disable Automatic Updates ............................................................... 67

Disable Internet Explorer Enhanced SecurityConfiguration (Windows Server 2003) ....................... 68

Disable Hyperthreading ...................................................................... 68

Page 7: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

3BSE034678R4101 7

3BSE034678R4101 7

Change Local Security Policy on Windows XP Professional SP2......68

Internet Information Services ..........................................................................................69

Windows XP Professional....................................................................................69

Windows Server 2003 ..........................................................................................70

Windows Service Packs...................................................................................................71

Network Adapters............................................................................................................72

Domain Controller and DNS Server................................................................................74

Domain Setup Procedure.....................................................................75

Users and Groups ............................................................................................................78

New Organizational Unit......................................................................................79

Groups .............................................................................................................80

800xA Service User .............................................................................................80

User Account for Installation ...............................................................................81

Other Users...........................................................................................................82

Adding Nodes to a Domain .............................................................................................82

Add nodes in the DNS Reverse Lookup Zone for the Secondary Network.........83

Adding 800xA Domain Users to the Local Administrator Group ..................................84

Internet Explorer..............................................................................................................85

DirectX ............................................................................................................................86

.NET Framework .............................................................................................................87

Enable SNMP Service .....................................................................................................88

Microsoft Word................................................................................................................89

Microsoft Excel ...............................................................................................................89

Microsoft Office FrontPage .............................................................................................90

Visual BASIC 6 with SP6................................................................................................90

MSXML ..........................................................................................................................91

SQL Server 2000 ........................................................................................................92

SQL Server 2000 Installation Procedure..............................................................93

SQL Server Installation (on Batch Clients)..........................................................95

SQL Server Service Pack 3a Installation .............................................................97

MDAC .............................................................................................................................98

Acrobat Reader ................................................................................................................99

Page 8: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

8 3BSE034678R4101

Remote (Thin) Client for Windows Server 2003 ............................................................ 99

Remote (Thin) Client for Windows 2000 Server ............................................................ 99

Prerequisites......................................................................................................... 99

Internet Information Services (IIS) and Terminal Services ............................... 100

Internet Information Services Installation ........................................ 100

Terminal Services Installation........................................................... 101

Citrix Metaframe XP ......................................................................................... 101

Citrix Licensing ................................................................................................. 101

800xA System Workplace and other Applications ............................................ 101

Citrix Configuration: Publishing Applications .................................................. 102

Remote Client Configuration............................................................................. 104

Using Internet Explorer .................................................................... 104

Using the ICA Client ........................................................................ 105

Backup Software ........................................................................................................... 105

Virus Scan Software ...................................................................................................... 106

Section 4 - Central Licensing System (CLS)Introduction ................................................................................................................... 107

Licensing Overview ...................................................................................................... 108

License Server Setup..................................................................................................... 109

Installation ......................................................................................................... 109

Obtaining the Machine ID ................................................................................. 110

Obtaining the Ethernet Address ........................................................ 112

Reading the Machine ID from a Dongle........................................... 113

Requesting Software Keys ................................................................................. 113

License Client................................................................................................................ 114

CLS System Extension.................................................................................................. 115

Section 5 - RNRPIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 117

Installation..................................................................................................................... 117

Verification .................................................................................................................... 118

Page 9: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

3BSE034678R4101 9

3BSE034678R4101 9

Section 6 - Process Portal and Basic System FunctionsIntroduction ...................................................................................................................119

Process Portal ................................................................................................................120

Basic System Functions.................................................................................................122

SoftPoint Server.............................................................................................................123

Section 7 - 800xA InstructionsIntroduction ...................................................................................................................125

Installation .....................................................................................................................125

Section 8 - Diagnostics Collection ToolIntroduction ...................................................................................................................127

Supported Products........................................................................................................127

Installation .....................................................................................................................127

Section 9 - SMS and e-mail MessagingIntroduction ...................................................................................................................129

Installation .....................................................................................................................129

Section 10 - AC 800MIntroduction ...................................................................................................................131

AC 800M Connect.........................................................................................................131

Control Builder M .........................................................................................................132

Control Builder M Software...............................................................................133

Firmware ...........................................................................................................133

OPC Server for AC 800M .............................................................................................134

Base Software for SoftControl ......................................................................................136

Section 11 - FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device IntegrationIntroduction ...................................................................................................................137

Installation .....................................................................................................................138

General Settings .................................................................................................139

Default Language ...............................................................................................139

Page 10: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

10 3BSE034678R4101

Fieldbus Builder FF Settings ............................................................................. 139

Page Layout ....................................................................................................... 141

FF Standard Dictionary...................................................................................... 141

OPC Server FF Settings ..................................................................................... 142

Registration Overview ....................................................................................... 143

Section 12 - HART Device IntegrationIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 145

Installation..................................................................................................................... 146

Section 13 - PROFIBUS Device IntegrationIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 149

Installation..................................................................................................................... 150

Section 14 - 800xA for Advant MasterIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 153

System Configuration.................................................................................................... 153

Software Installation ..................................................................................................... 154

Configurations for More than 20 Controllers................................................................ 157

AC 800M as a Gate Between MB 300 Control Networks ............................................ 157

Section 15 - 800xA for DCIIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 159

Composer CTK Software .............................................................................................. 159

Redundant Connections to Harmony DCUs ................................................................. 159

Installation..................................................................................................................... 160

Section 16 - 800xA for HarmonyIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 163

Prerequisite Setup.......................................................................................................... 163

Create Accounts and Users ................................................................................ 163

Local Service Accounts .................................................................... 164

Assign User Administrative Rights................................................... 165

DCOM Settings.................................................................................................. 166

Page 11: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

3BSE034678R4101 11

3BSE034678R4101 11

Installation .....................................................................................................................168

Setup Type Selection .....................................................................................................169

Configuration Server Setup Type .......................................................................170

Configuration Server with Connectivity Server Setup Type ..............................174

Connectivity Server Setup Type.........................................................................176

Client Setup Type ...............................................................................................177

Configure Access Rights ...............................................................................................177

Section 17 - 800xA for MelodyIntroduction ...................................................................................................................179

Prerequisite Setup ..........................................................................................................179

Create Accounts And Users ...............................................................................179

DCOM Settings ..................................................................................................182

Regional Settings................................................................................................184

Installation .....................................................................................................................184

Setup Type Selection..........................................................................................186

Melody System Extension.................................................................187

Melody Config Server .......................................................................187

Melody Connectivity Server .............................................................196

Configure Access Rights ....................................................................................197

800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation........................................................200

Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300Introduction ...................................................................................................................203

Prerequisites and Requirements ....................................................................................203

MOD 300 System Requirements .......................................................................203

Software Requirements ......................................................................................203

RTAB Requirements...........................................................................................204

Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................205

Real-Time Accelerator Board Installation.....................................................................205

800xA for MOD 300 Installation Wizard......................................................................206

PAS - System Services .......................................................................................207

800xA for MOD 300 Software (MOD 300 Connect) ........................................208

Page 12: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

12 3BSE034678R4101

Section 19 - PLC ConnectIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 211

Installation Instructions ................................................................................................. 211

Section 20 - 800xA for SafeguardIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 213

System Configuration.................................................................................................... 213

Installation..................................................................................................................... 214

Section 21 - Engineering StudioIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 215

Server/Client Installations.................................................................................. 216

Basic Installation Steps ...................................................................................... 216

Engineering Studio Dependencies ..................................................................... 217

Installation..................................................................................................................... 218

Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine .................................................... 218

Engineering Platform......................................................................................... 219

Topology Designer............................................................................................. 221

Function Designer.............................................................................................. 222

Reuse Assistant .................................................................................................. 223

Script Manager................................................................................................... 223

Additional Configuration .............................................................................................. 224

Download and Install Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine Security Patch..225

Document Manager - AutoCAD Integration ..................................................... 225

Required Licenses ......................................................................................................... 226

What to do Next ............................................................................................................ 226

Section 22 - Asset OptimizationIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 227

Prerequisites .................................................................................................................. 227

Defining the System Environment for Maximo Integration.......................................... 228

Network Topology ............................................................................................. 229

System Security ................................................................................................. 229

Systems Configuration....................................................................................... 230

Page 13: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

3BSE034678R4101 13

3BSE034678R4101 13

Accessing Maximo Server Versions 4.1 and 4.1.1 ........................................................230

Accessing Maximo Server Version 5.1..........................................................................232

Asset Optimization Software.........................................................................................233

PC, Network and Software Monitoring .........................................................................234

PC, Network and Software Monitoring Software ..............................................234

Complete Installation ........................................................................235

Typical Installation............................................................................236

Independent Component Installation.............................................................................236

Network and Device Scanning Tool...................................................................237

Network Monitor................................................................................................237

Site Planning ....................................................................................237

Switches and Hubs ............................................................................237

Installation ....................................................................................238

Section 23 - Production ManagementIntroduction ...................................................................................................................241

Batch Management Installation .....................................................................................241

Manufacturing Management..........................................................................................243

Common Installation Steps ................................................................................243

Application Server Installation...........................................................................244

Client Installation ...............................................................................................245

IForm Developer ................................................................................................245

Section 24 - Information ManagementIntroduction ...................................................................................................................247

IM Server.......................................................................................................................248

Preparation .........................................................................................................248

Microsoft Message Queuing Services (MSMQ)- Windows Server 2003 ..............................................249

Microsoft Message Queuing Services (MSMQ)- Windows 2000 Server ..............................................249

Oracle ...........................................................................................................250

Oracle 8 Client ..................................................................................250

Oracle 9 ....................................................................................251

Page 14: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

14 3BSE034678R4101

Information Management Server Installation .................................................... 254

Client Toolkit................................................................................................................. 256

Desktop Tools................................................................................................................ 258

Desktop Tools Installation Guidelines ............................................................... 258

Desktop Tools Installation ................................................................................. 260

Information Management Profiles Client Installation................................................... 262

Troubleshooting Install Errors....................................................................................... 262

Section 25 - Licensing 800xA System SoftwareIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 263

Software Key Installation .............................................................................................. 263

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 265

Locating the License File................................................................................... 266

Unavailable Machine IDs................................................................................... 266

Rainbow Dongles.............................................................................. 266

Ethernet Address............................................................................... 268

Assigning Licenses........................................................................................................ 268

Backup/Restore .................................................................................................. 269

License Assignment Editor Diagnostics ............................................................ 269

License Status Viewer ................................................................................................... 269

License Violations.............................................................................................. 271

Temporary Licenses ........................................................................................... 272

CLS Relocation Tool.......................................................................................... 272

Appendix A - Third Party SoftwareIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 273

Appendix B - 800xA and WorkgroupsIntroduction ................................................................................................................... 281

Preparation and Configuration ...................................................................................... 281

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 283

Problem with Hostname Lookup ....................................................................... 284

Failure to add Client or Server to the 800xA System ........................................ 284

Log Over Fails ................................................................................................... 286

Page 15: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

3BSE034678R4101 15

3BSE034678R4101 15

Invalid Account Encountered During System Software User Settings ..............286

HTTP 500 - Internal Server Error Message .......................................................287

Appendix C - Users, Groups, and Rights AssignmentsIntroduction ...................................................................................................................289

User Groups and Users ..................................................................................................289

Local Groups and Members on Each Node...................................................................290

User Assignment Rights ................................................................................................291

Appendix D - Installation Media

INDEX

Page 16: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Table of Contents

16 3BSE034678R4101

Page 17: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 17

About This Book

GeneralThis book describes how to install software for the IndustrialIT 800xA System. This book covers the 800xA System version 4.1 and optional functional areas. The applicable product versions are listed in Table 1.

Table 1. Product Versions

Product Version

800xA for Advant Master 4.0.0 and 4.1.0

800xA for DCI 4.1.0

800xA for Harmony 4.1.0

800xA for Melody 4.0.0 and 4.1.0

800xA for MOD 300 4.1.0

800xA for Safeguard 4.0.0

AC 800M Connect 4.1.0

Asset Optimization 4.1.0

Central Licensing System (CLS) 4.1.0

CLS System Extension 4.1.0

Control Builder M 4.1.0

Control Software for AC 800M 4.1.0

Core System and Workplace Client 4.0.0 and 4.1.0

Diagnostics Collection Tool (DCT) 4.1.0

Page 18: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

New Installations About This Book

18 3BSE034678R4101

The procedures described in this book require Windows ® Administrator privileges.

New InstallationsIf not starting with a preinstalled system, refer to Section 1, Installation Planning for guidelines on how to proceed with the installation and setup.

Engineering Studio 4.1.0

FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus Device Integration 4.1.0

HART Device Integration 4.1.0

HART Multiplexer Connect 4.1.0

Information Management 4.1.0

OPC ® server for AC 800M 4.1.0

PC, Network and Software Monitoring 4.1.0

PLC Connect 4.1.0

Production Management 4.1.0

PROFIBUS ® Device Integration 4.1.0

SMS and e-mail Messaging 4.0.0

SoftPoint Server 4.1.0

The security measures described in this document, for example, for user access, network security, firewalls, virus protection, etc., represent possible steps that a user of an IndustrialIT ™ Integrated Automation System may want to consider based on a risk assessment for a particular application and installation. This risk assessment, as well as the proper implementation, configuration, installation, operation, administration, and maintenance of all relevant security related equipment, software, and procedures, are the responsibility of the user of the Industrial IT Integrated Automation System.

Table 1. Product Versions (Continued)

Product Version

Page 19: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

About This Book Upgrades

3BSE034678R4101 19

UpgradesIf an installed system exists and is being upgraded from System Baseline 2.1/2 to System Version 4.1, from System Version 3.1 SP2 to System Version 4.1, or from System Version 4.0 to System Version 4.1, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Upgrade and Installation.

Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Upgrade and Installation contains upgrade preparation and post upgrade procedures. Upgrading most individual application software requires referring back to this installation instruction to install the application software. Unless otherwise noted, the procedures for installing the application software for a new installation and installing the application software as part of an upgrade are identical. If required, differences in the two installation procedures will be clearly identified.

System InstallerA new system installation can be executed either semi-automatically using the System Installer as described in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automated Installation, or manually as described in this instruction.

Intended User This instruction is intended for installation engineers with experience with process control systems and Microsoft® Windows operating systems. In general, Microsoft Windows functions are not described in this instruction.

Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip IconsThis publication includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate to point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to point out useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be interpreted as follows:

Electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock.

Page 20: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Document Conventions About This Book

20 3BSE034678R4101

Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all Warning and Caution notices.

Document ConventionsThe following conventions are used for the presentation of material:

• The words in names of screen elements (for example, the title in the title bar of a window, the label for a field of a dialog) are initially capitalized.

• Capital letters are used for the name of a keyboard key if it is labeled on the keyboard. For example, press the ENTER key.

• Lowercase letters are used for the name of a keyboard key that is not labeled on the keyboard. For example, the space bar, comma key, and so on.

• Press CTRL+C indicates that you must hold down the CTRL key while pressing the C key (to copy a selected object in this case).

• Press ESC E C indicates that you press and release each key in sequence (to copy a selected object in this case).

• The names of push and toggle buttons are boldfaced. For example, click OK.

• The names of menus and menu items are boldfaced. For example, the File menu.

– The following convention is used for menu operations: MenuName > MenuItem > CascadedMenuItem. For example: select File > New > Type.

Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal injury.

Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.

Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.

Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to use a certain function

Page 21: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

About This Book Version Numbers in Screen Captures

3BSE034678R4101 21

– The Start menu name always refers to the Start menu on the Windows Task Bar.

• System prompts/messages are shown in the Courier font, and user responses/input are in the boldfaced Courier font. For example, if you enter a value out of range, the following message is displayed:

Entered value is not valid. The value must be 0 to 30.

You may be told to enter the string TIC132 in a field. The string is shown as follows in the procedure:

TIC132

Variables are shown using lowercase letters.

sequence name

Version Numbers in Screen CapturesThe version numbers shown in some figures in this instruction are examples and may not correspond to the current version.

Applicable SpecificationsThis product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC.

Related DocumentsTable 2 lists and describes the documentation referred to in this instruction.

Table 2. Related Documents

Category Title Description

System Administration

Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Administration and Security

3BSE037410R4101

Installation Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup 3BUA000156R4101

Page 22: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Related Documents About This Book

22 3BSE034678R4101

Installation (continued)

Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Upgrade and Installation

3BSE036342R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automated Installation 3BSE034679R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - System, System Checker 3BSE041447R4101

Software Industrial IT, 800xA - Asset Optimization, Configuration

3BUA000118R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - Information Management, Configuration

3BUF001092R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - Device Management, HART, Configuration

3BDD011748R4001

Industrial IT, 800xA - Device Management, PROFIBUS, Configuration

3BDD011750R4001

Industrial IT, 800xA - Engineering, Process Engineering Tool Integration, Installation

3BUA000185R4101

Conductor NT (Version 5.0) Introduction and Installation

WFPEEUI220001D0

Other Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration

3BSE034463R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Release Notes 3BSE038357R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - Device Management, HART, Release Notes

3BDD011768R4101

Industrial IT, 800xA - Device Management, PROFIBUS, Release Notes

3BDD011767R4101

Table 2. Related Documents (Continued)

Category Title Description

Page 23: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 23

Section 1 Installation Planning

IntroductionThis book describes how to install software for the 800xA System. These procedures require Windows Administrator privileges.

System CheckerThe System Checker is designed for the purpose of checking, verifying, documenting, and troubleshooting an 800xA System. It includes the following:

• Node Report tool.• System Checker tool.• System Information Collector tool.• System Report tool.

The System Checker supports 800xA System Versions 3.x and 4.x. It also supports System Baseline 2.x with some limitations. Those limitations, as well as the installation and use of the System Checker is described in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, System Checker.

New InstallationsRefer to System Overview to determine the size and scope of the system being set up. Review the pre-installation guidelines in Planning and Preparation on page 26, and then refer to the applicable instructions for each node type in Section 2, General Installation Procedures.

A new system installation can be executed either semi-automatically using the System Installer as described in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automated Installation, or manually as described in this instruction.

Page 24: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Hardware Requirements Section 1 Installation Planning

24 3BSE034678R4101

Hardware RequirementsRefer to Third Party Hardware Products Verified for Industrial IT System 800xA for a list of hardware verified for use with the 800xA System. This document can be accessed from ABB Solutions Bank at:

http://solutionsbank.us.abb.com/

Hot FixesHot fixes for third party prerequisites that the 800xA System software has been found to be compatible with are listed in the tables in Appendix A, Third Party Software.

UpgradesIf an installed system exists and is being upgraded from System Baseline 2.1/2 to System Version 4.1, from System Version 3.1 SP2 to System Version 4.1, or from System Version 4.0 to System Version 4.1, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Upgrade and Installation.

How to Proceed for New InstallationsThis section describes the orderly sequence for completing the installation and setup procedures. The sequence for any system consists of the following basic steps:

1. Planning and physically installing the network and domain topology. The network is an integrated part of the 800xA System. The network components depend on fast and reliable communication.

An 800xA System installation can be configured either as a Windows Domain or as a Windows Workgroup (refer to Domains Versus Workgroups on page 34).

2. Planning and preparation. This involves acquiring all the information needed for installation and setup with regard to network parameters, software keys, etc. All installation media must be obtained, and it must be confirmed that all required hardware is in place and meets the system requirements. Refer to Planning and Preparation on page 26.

Page 25: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning How to Proceed for New Installations

3BSE034678R4101 25

3. Installing software:

– Installing prerequisites. Choose and install the applicable Windows operating system, and other third party prerequisite software. The Windows operating system is generally installed from the manufacturer’s CD. Most of the other prerequisites are provided on the DVDs created and provided by ABB. Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software for a list of third party software, version information, hot fixes, and how the software is obtained. Table 8 on page 39 and Table 9 on page 40 list the node types on which to install the software.

Appendix A, Third Party Software details the third party software (including hot fixes and service packs) that has been evaluated for use with the 800xA System. The 800xA System has been found to be fully compatible and functional with this software as of the date of this document. Refer to ABB Solutions Bank for an up-to-date, comprehensive listing of all software that has been evaluated including service packs and hot fixes released following the 800xA System release. The complete list of software can be found at:

http://solutionsbank.us.abb.com/

Make a disk image of each node after the operating system and all third party software is installed. For some applications, especially Information Management, it is important that you make a disk image of each disk that holds configuration and/or application data. For example, the history database may be distributed on two or more disks.

– Installing 800xA System software. This software is installed from the 800xA System Installation DVDs.

4. Post installation setup. This involves building the system by adding system extensions for the installed functional areas, and adding the installed nodes to the system. There are also application-specific post installation procedures for some functional areas; for example, creating a history database for Information Management. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup for more information.

5. Make another, separate disk image of each node after all 800xA System software has been installed and post installation setup procedures have been performed. For some applications, especially Information Management, it is

Page 26: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Planning and Preparation Section 1 Installation Planning

26 3BSE034678R4101

important that you make a disk image of each disk that holds configuration and/or application data. For example, the history database may be distributed on two or more disks.

Planning and PreparationThis section provides guidelines for acquiring the information needed for installation with regard to network parameters, software keys, etc. Gather the required installation media needed to complete the installation, and confirm that all required hardware is in place and meets the system requirements.

When finished with these planning and preparation guidelines, refer to Section 2, General Installation Procedures to begin installing software.

Before installing and configuring (post installation) the 800xA System, there are several parameters and system settings whose values must be determined and available. Table 3 provides a worksheet for recording this information. It lists node types and their applicable parameters, and provides a Value column for recording the information.

For guidelines on parameters related to network and domain setup, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration.

An organization should be in place to manage the domain with assigned responsibilities and methods handling users and security.

Insure that the systems are clean from unwanted third party programs and that the systems have recently been checked for viruses and trojans. Connections to the Internet should pass through a well-configured firewall.

Table 3. Installation and Configuration Parameter Worksheet

Node Type Parameter ValueAll Nodes Primary IP address

Secondary IP address

Subnet mask

Node nameTime sync protocols

Time sync role and configuration (per protocol)

RNRP network area, node number, and local flag

Page 27: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning Planning and Preparation

3BSE034678R4101 27

PC Nodes DNS Server addresses

AC 800M Controllers

Backup CPU primary and secondary IP address

Tool port IP addressCommunication modules

IO modules

Domain Server

Domain nameUser Groups

Users

Concept of PPA roles and permissions on system, structures, and aspect object level

Network adapter typeDNS Server Backup needs IP address of primary

Aspect Server

Affinity - Aspect Server Base Service

Affinity - Aspect Server node name of clientsAffinity - node name of redundant Aspect Servers

Network adapter type

Affinity - Connectivity Server Base Service

Affinity - Connectivity Server node name of clientsAffinity - node name of parallel Connectivity Server

AC 400 Controller

MB 300 netw number1

MB 300 netw number2MB 300 node number

800xA for Advant Master

MB 300 netw number1

MB 300 netw number2MB 300 node number

Connectivity Server

Network adapter type

(Managed) Switches

IP address

Disk Image Server IP address

Session namesBackup identities and filenames

Table 3. Installation and Configuration Parameter Worksheet (Continued)

Node Type Parameter Value

Page 28: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Overview Section 1 Installation Planning

28 3BSE034678R4101

System OverviewThe 800xA System is a distributed set of server and client nodes that reside on a network.

Server classes are deployed in nodes - a node is an addressable machine (a computer) in a network. For very small installations, one single node can carry all server categories as well as the client parts of the products.

For smaller systems, certain server functions may be combined on a single node, for example, combined Aspect and Connectivity Server. As installations grow larger, one or several Application Servers may be added to run server parts of the products. Aspect and Connectivity Servers may be redundant.

Node Types

The maximum number of nodes of each type per 800xA System are listed in Table 4. The numbers in parenthesis state the node count for redundant configurations. For example, 8 (16) means 8 nodes in singular configurations, or 16 nodes (8 pairs) in redundant configurations.

Table 4. Maximum Node Types Per System

Node Max Per System

Out of Which

CommentClass Type

Servers Domain Servers 1 (2) — —

Aspect Servers 1 (2 or 3) — —

Connectivity Servers 12 (24) — —AC 800M 8 (16) —

PROFIBUS Device Integration 8 (16) —

HART Device Integration 8 (16) —FF Device Integration 8 (16) —

PLC Connect 8 (16) —

800xA for Advant Master 6 (12) Maximum 2 (4) per MB300 Network.800xA for Harmony 3 (6) —

800xA for Melody 8 (16) —

800xA for MOD 300 3 (6) —800xA for SafeGuard — Refer to 800xA for Advant Master.

800xA for DCI 4 (8) —

Page 29: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning Node Types

3BSE034678R4101 29

Servers (continued)

Application Servers 10 — —

Batch 1 (2) —IM 6 —

AO 4 —

MM 1 —

Other applications 2Application specific restrictions may apply (refer to System Configurations on page 36).

Remote Client Servers 2 — —Combined — — —

AS + CS 1 (2) — —

AS + CS + AO 1 (2) —The AO Server function is not redundant.

Batch + IM + MM 1 — —Clients Rich Clients 40 — —

Operator Workplaces 40 —

Batch Workplaces 40 —

MM Workplaces 40 —IM Workplaces 40 —

Engineering Workplaces 10 —

Remote Clients

Remote Clients 15 — —Per Remote Client Server — 8 —

AC 800M Controllers

Per system 75 —

Per Connectivity Server <20 Application dependent.

Nodes per network area

Client/Server network 100 No controllers.

Control network 50 —

Combined system network 50 —

Table 4. Maximum Node Types Per System (Continued)

Node Max Per System

Out of Which

CommentClass Type

Page 30: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Node Types Section 1 Installation Planning

30 3BSE034678R4101

Node types can be broken down into the following categories:

• Basic Node Types.• Combined Node Types.

Basic Node Types

Basic node types include:

• Domain Server node (not required for single-node systems, or those using workgroups): Runs the Domain Controller and Domain Name System (DNS). Contains matching copies of the user accounts in a given domain.

A Domain Controller is required for any system that is not a single-node system or standalone engineering station, or those that use Workgroups (refer to Appendix B, 800xA and Workgroups). Redundant Domain Controllers may be implemented on an optional basis. Domain Controllers require the Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server operating system.

If using domains, install and configure the Domain Controller before installing other system nodes.

• Aspect Server node: Runs the aspect directory and other services related to object management, object names and structures, security, etc. Redundant Aspect Servers may be implemented on an optional basis. This is also the Domain Controller and DNS when separate Domain Servers are not used.

• Connectivity Server node: Runs connect services, providing access to controllers and other data sources. Redundant (parallel) Connectivity Servers may be implemented on an optional basis.

• Application Server node: Application servers run the services related to a specific functional area, for example: Batch Management, Information Management, or Asset Optimization. Application Servers require Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server. Application Servers include:

– Batch Server: runs Batch Management.– MM Server: runs Manufacturing Management (requires Windows Server

2003).– IM Server: runs Information Management.– AO Server: runs Asset Optimization.– Other applications: such as large SoftPoint and Calculation Server

applications, 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server, 800xA for Melody Configuration Server, integrated third party applications, etc.

Page 31: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning Node Types

3BSE034678R4101 31

• Remote Client Server node: Provides terminal server functionality to connect to remote workplaces.

The Thin Client feature allows displays to be run on remote computers that do not have the client applications installed. The remote computers require Microsoft Terminal Server functionality. These computers may connect to a terminal server that has Windows 2000 Server, Microsoft Terminal Server, and the applicable 800xA software installed. The terminal server may be set up directly on a server node, or on a dedicated terminal server computer. This architecture is illustrated in Figure 1.

Any number of users may be set up on the terminal server. The terminal server software lets you configure these users to have access to any application on that computer. Configuration settings are saved in the standard Windows directories on a per-user basis to support this.

Citrix Server is only applicable to Windows 2000 Server.

Figure 1. Thin Client Architecture (Diagram Shown uses Citrix Server)

CLIENT SERVER WITH:(REFER TO NOTE 1)

WINDOWS SERVER 2003 -OR-WINDOWS 2000 SERVER,CITRIX SERVER, AND DISPLAY AND CLIENTSERVICES

RUNNING:2 DESKTOP TRENDS2 DATADIRECT1 DESKTOP TICKER

DATA SERVER

CITRIX CLIENT 1 WITHCITRIX CLIENT

RUNNING DESKTOPTRENDS, DESKTOPTICKER, AND DATADIRECT

CITRIX CLIENT 2 WITHCITRIX CLIENT

RUNNING DESKTOPTREND DISLPAY

CITRIX CLIENT 3 WITHCITRIX CLIENT

RUNNING DESKTOPTREND DISPLAYAND DATADIRECT

NOTE 1: THE CLIEINT SERVER MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE SAME NODE AS THE DATASERVER, OR IT MAY BE INSTALLED ON A DEDICATED NODE.

ACC/ADC/ADP

DATA REQUESTED

DATA RETURNED

T05247A

Page 32: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Node Types Section 1 Installation Planning

32 3BSE034678R4101

Once the terminal server has been configured, any machine that has the required client software set up may now open these remote applications, which will run virtually on their local machine, but in reality will be running on the terminal server. Multiple users may run the same application simultaneously. The only limitation is that no more than five instances of Microsoft Excel may be running on the same machine at one time. This limitation is imposed by Microsoft.

The client applications operate in the same manner as if they were being run locally. The applications must still connect to a data server, in some cases to specify which data server is to be accessed, or for some applications, to simply obtain a valid license.

• Client node: Runs workplace functionality, such as operator and engineering workplaces, including Batch, MM, IM, and AO Clients.

• Information Management Consolidation node: The Information Management Consolidation node allows for consolidating historical data from IM Servers in other systems on one node. This requires:

– Install the IM Server software on a dedicated consolidation node. This node must be set up as a single node system. Follow the procedure for installing an Information Management Application Server (IM Server on page 248).

– Create the single node system for the consolidation node and add the system extensions for all installed functions. These procedures are covered in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

– Complete all other post installation as required by an IM Server. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

Combined Node Types

• In order to optimize the cost/performance ratio for a particular installation, certain server functions can be combined in the same node. Depending on what

All server node types except Domain Server nodes and Remote Client Server nodes include client functionality. These clients are referred to as server based clients.

Page 33: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning Configuration Rules

3BSE034678R4101 33

functions are combined, there are different limitations to system sizes. Approved combinations are:

– AS + CS: Aspect and Connectivity Server.– AS + CS + AO: Aspect, Connectivity, and AO Server.– Batch + IM + MM: Batch, IM, and MM Server. – Single node engineering system.

Other elements of the 800xA System include:

• Controllers: Run applications for real-time process control. Controllers connect to the control network.

• I/O Systems: Provide the interface to process transducers. I/O stations connect to controllers, either directly, or via fieldbuses.

• Network and Network Devices: Support communication between the various system nodes, as well as communication outside the system (via plant intranet, or the Internet). The 800xA System uses three networks:

– Control network.– Client/Server network.– Plant network (intranet).

Configuration Rules

Configuration rules that must be taken into account when planning the system are:

• Generic Configuration Rules.• Domains Versus Workgroups.• Windows XP Professional Versus Windows Server (2000 or 2003).• Optimized System Configurations.• Engineering Systems.

Generic Configuration Rules

• Refer to Table 4 for the maximum number of nodes of each type per system.

• The following connect services (and no other) can be combined in Connectivity Server nodes, combined Aspect and Connectivity Server nodes, and combined Aspect, Connectivity, and AO Server nodes:

– AC 800M Connect.

Page 34: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Configuration Rules Section 1 Installation Planning

34 3BSE034678R4101

– FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration.– PROFIBUS Device Integration/HART Device Integration.– PLC Connect.– PC, Network and Software Monitoring (PNSM).

• 800xA for Advant Master connect services must run in Connectivity Server nodes. It can be combined with 800xA for SafeGuard in the same node, but not with any other connect services.

• 800xA for Harmony Server, 800xA for Melody Server, 800xA for MOD 300 Server, and 800xA for DCI Server must run in Connectivity Server nodes. They can not be combined with each other or with any other connect services in the same node.

Domains Versus Workgroups

An 800xA System installation can be configured either as a Windows Domain or as a Windows Workgroup.

When the system is configured as a domain, a separate (optionally redundant) Domain Server is required. For installation as a production system, it is recommended that the 800xA System form its own domain. It should not be part of a larger domain, such as a corporate network domain.

The Domain Controller stores and manages information about user credentials and access rights, both for humans and for the system. It provides the Active Directory service that manages user access to a network, which includes user logon, authentication, and access to the directory and shared resources. Every domain must have at least one Domain Controller. For resilience, a domain should have multiple Domain Controllers to support the handling of logon requests and directory updates.

All other 800xA System server and client nodes must be configured to be members of the domain. The 800xA System requires the use of static IP addresses on all system nodes.

For details on planning and physical set up for networks and domains, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration.

A Workgroup System should not consist of more than a combined Aspect and Connectivity Server, separate Application Servers, and five or six clients. A

Page 35: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning Configuration Rules

3BSE034678R4101 35

Workgroup becomes increasingly difficult to administrate as the number of users and computers grows. Workgroups should therefore be considered only for small systems with few users. Refer to Appendix B, 800xA and Workgroups for more information on Windows Workgroups.

Windows XP Professional Versus Windows Server (2000 or 2003)

Certain server types can run on Windows XP Professional as well as on Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003.

• When Windows XP Professional is used for the Aspect Servers, the system size is limited to nine nodes, not counting Domain Servers.

• When Windows XP Professional is used for any other server, except for the Aspect Servers, the system size is limited to 11 nodes, not counting Domain Servers.

These limitations depend on Microsoft licensing rules for Windows XP and Internet Information Services (IIS).

Server types that always require Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003 are:

• Domain Server.• Batch Server.• IM Server (except in single node engineering systems).• AO Server (in all configurations except in single node systems).• 800xA for Harmony Server.• 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server.• 800xA for Melody Server.• 800xA for Melody Configuration Server.

Optimized System Configurations

By using combined node types, it is possible to optimize the system configuration for small and medium sized applications.

• A single node system is a system that consists of one combined Aspect and Connectivity Server node, or one combined Aspect, Connectivity, and AO Server node.

All servers in a redundant group (1-out-of-2 or 2-out-of-3) must use the same operating system.

Page 36: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

36 3BSE034678R4101

• Systems with up to five clients and limited application size can be configured with combined Aspect and Connectivity Server nodes; combined Aspect, Connectivity, and AO Server nodes; combined Batch, IM, and MM Server nodes; and with server based clients.

• For larger applications, the Batch and IM Servers should run on separate servers, and the clients should also be separate.

Engineering Systems

An Engineering System is intended for engineering only (no production). The same basic configuration rules apply to an Engineering System as to Production Systems, except for the single node Engineering System.

With respect to domain membership, there are two use cases for the engineering system:

• The engineering system is used standalone; for example, in an engineering office. There are three possible alternatives:

– The system can be added to an existing domain; for example, in an office network domain.

– The system can be defined as a new domain added to an existing domain controller.

– The system can be defined as a separate domain with its own domain controller and DNS server, or as a workgroup (i.e. same as a Production System).

• The Engineering System is connected to a Production System and is used for system synchronization. In this configuration, the Engineering System must belong to the same domain as the Production System.

System ConfigurationsThe legend for Table 6 through Table 27 is listed in Table 5.

• Table 6 lists the node types and install options for those node types.

• Table 7 lists the approved Microsoft operating systems and the node types they can be used on.

Page 37: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 37

• Table 8 lists third party software, always installed prior to 800xA System installation, and the node types they must be installed on.

• Table 9 lists third party software, conditionally installed prior to 800xA System installation, and the node types they must be installed on.

• Table 10 lists the 800xA System and Operations software and the node types they must be installed on.

• Table 11 through Table 27 list the various 800xA System functional areas and their node types.

Table 5. Legend for Table 6 through Table 27

Symbol Definition

A Alternative configuration (for performance, size, or cost reasons).

E The software function is installed in all nodes, and enabled in this node.

X Default configuration. The software function is installed and enabled in this node.

AS Aspect Server

CS Connectivity Server

DS Domain Server

AO Asset Optimization

IM Information Management

MM Manufacturing Management

Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software for a complete list of third party software, version information, and how it is supplied.

Table 6. Computer Types and Install Options

Node TypeComputer Type

Server WorkstationDS X

AS A ACS A A

Page 38: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

38 3BSE034678R4101

Application Server

Batch Management XManufacturing Management X

Information Management X

Asset Optimization XOther X

Remote Client Server X

Client XCombined Servers

AS + CS A A

AS + CS + AO XBatch + IM + MM X

Single Node Engineering X

Table 7. Operating Systems Node Types1,2

Node TypeWindows 2000

ServerWindows

Server™ 2003Windows XP Professional3

DS A A

AS A A A

CS A A A4

Application Server

Batch Management A A

Manufacturing Management XInformation Management A A

Asset Optimization A A

Other A ARemote Client Server A A

Client X

Combined ServersAS + CS5 A A A

AS + CS + AO5 A A6

Batch + IM + MM X

Table 6. Computer Types and Install Options (Continued)

Node TypeComputer Type

Server Workstation

Page 39: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 39

Combined Servers (continued)Single Node Engineering A A

NOTES:1. Always install as indicated prior to 800xA System installation.2. All servers in a redundant group (1-out-of-2 or 2-out-of-3) must use the same operating system.3. When Windows XP Professional is used in any server the system size is limited. Refer to Windows

XP Professional Versus Windows Server (2000 or 2003) on page 35.4. Certain connectivities require that Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003 be used on the

Connectivity Server. Refer to Windows XP Professional Versus Windows Server (2000 or 2003) on page 35.

5. Refer to Generic Configuration Rules on page 33 for limitations on which types of connect services can be combined in the AS + CS and AS + CS + AO combined servers.

6. Only for single node system. Refer to Windows XP Professional Versus Windows Server (2000 or 2003) on page 35.

Table 8. Third Party Software Always Installed1, 2

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS +

CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Domain Controller and DNS

X

.Net Framework

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Adobe Acrobat Reader ®

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ASP .Net X3 X4 X X X X3,4 X3,4 X

Citrix ® MetaFrame ® Server

X5

DirectX ® X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Internet Explorer

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

IIS X8 X X X X X X X X8 X8 X X

MDAC X X X X X X X X X X X X X

MSMQ X X X

MSDE9 X6 X6 X6 X6 X

Table 7. Operating Systems Node Types1,2 (Continued)

Node TypeWindows 2000

ServerWindows

Server™ 2003Windows XP Professional3

Page 40: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

40 3BSE034678R4101

MSXML X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Sentinel ™ System Driver (Dongle)

X X X X

SNMP driver X7 X7 X7

Windows Installer

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

NOTES:1. Always install as indicated prior to 800xA System installation.2. Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software for version information and how the software is supplied.3. Install only in the node where the Central Licensing Server is installed in a redundant configuration.4. Required in nodes where 800xA for Harmony or 800xA for Melody Server is installed.5. Only when Windows 2000 Server is used.6. Required when used as workplace where Asset Optimization DMS Calibration Integration is used.7. Included in Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003; however, it must be enabled. Requires separate

installation on Windows 2000 Server. Refer to Enable SNMP Service on page 88.8. If using SMS and e-mail Messaging, with the Email Device, the SMTP component of IIS must be installed.9. MSDE is installed by Engineering Studio as a named instance, EBInstance. It is vendor supplied when used for AO

DMS Calibration Integration.

Table 9. Third Party Software Conditionally Installed1,2

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

AutoCAD® X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3

Autodesk VoloView Express

X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3

MS Office Pro Excel

X4 X4,5 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4,5 X4,5 X4 X4

MS Office Pro Word

X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6

Table 8. Third Party Software Always Installed1, 2 (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS +

CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 41: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 41

MS Office FrontPage® X7 X7

Visual BASIC® 6 + SP6

X8,9 X9 X9 X9 X9 X9 X9 X9 X9 X8,9 X8,9 X9 X

DMS Server X10 X10

DMS Client X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11

Maximo® SDK

X12 X12

SQL Server™ 2000 - Personal

X13

SQL Server 2000 - Standard

X14 X X X15 X

SQL Server 2000 - Standard Client

X16 X16 X16 X16 X16 X16 X16 X16 X16

NOTES:1. Conditionally install as indicated prior to 800xA System installation.2. Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software for version information and how the software is supplied.3. Required when used as a workplace where Document Manager - AutoCAD integration is used.4. Required when used as a workplace where Engineering Tools or Excel based reports is used.5. Required in Primary and Redundant Connectivity Servers where 800xA for Harmony or 800xA for Melody is used.6. Required when used as a workplace where Document Manager or Control Builder M is used.7. Required in nodes where Manufacturing Management IForm Developer is used.8. Required on the primary Aspect Server node.9. Required when used as an Engineering Workplace.10. Required on the Asset Optimization Main Server node if Asset Optimization DMS Calibration Integration is used.11. Required when used as a workplace if Asset Optimization DMS Calibration Integration is used.12. Required on the AO Main Server node if Asset Optimization Maximo Integration is used.13. Required if Batch Management is used. Only Windows XP Professional supports SQL Server 2000 Personal.14. Required in nodes where 800xA for Harmony Server or 800xA for Melody Server is installed.15. Required in nodes where 800xA for Harmony or Melody Configuration Servers are installed.16. Required if Batch Management is used (except where SQL Server is installed).

Table 9. Third Party Software Conditionally Installed1,2 (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 42: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

42 3BSE034678R4101

Table 10. 800xA System and Operations

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

RNRP X X X X X X X X X X X X X XDiagnostics Collection Tool

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Central Licensing Server

X1 X1 X1 X

Central Licensing Client

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Aspect Services

E E E E

• Aspect Directory Service

• Backup Service

• FSD Service

• System Message Service

• Xref Service

• Alarm Manager

• Soft Alarms Service

• External Alarm Service

Page 43: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 43

Connectivity Services

E E E E E E E E E

• Data Subscription Service

• History Service

• Alarm Logger Service

• Event Collector

• Time Sync Service

2 2 2

Application Services

E E E E

• SoftPoint Service

A3

• Calculation Service

A3

• Scheduler Service5 A3

• Property Transfer Service

A3

• Service Aspect Controller

A3

• Data Direct Service5

• SMS and e-mail Messaging Service

Table 10. 800xA System and Operations (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 44: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

44 3BSE034678R4101

PPA Aspects X X X X X X X X X X X X XGraphics Builder

X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X

CLS System Extension

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

NOTES:1. Install on only the one Aspect Server node for which the license file is issued.2. Enable only on one (redundant pair of) Connectivity Servers.3. This service is by default enabled in the Aspect Server. If the application size is large, it should be migrated to an

Application Server.4. Required when used as an Engineering Workplace.5. Required on any node when running reports.

Table 11. 800xA Instructions Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA Instructions

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 12. AC 800M Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

OPC Server for AC 800M

X X X

AC 800M Connect

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 10. 800xA System and Operations (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 45: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 45

Control Builder M

X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X

Base Software for SoftControl

X

NOTE:1. When used as an Engineering Workplace.

Table 13. FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

FIELDBUS Builder FF

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

OPC Server FF

X X X X

ABB FF Device Integration Library

X X X X X X X X

Table 14. HART Device Integration Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

ABB FDT Shared Components

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB FDT Base Container

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 12. AC 800M Node Types (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 46: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

46 3BSE034678R4101

ABB Fieldbus Builder PH

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

HART DTM Builder

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB HART Device Integration Library

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB S800 DTM

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB S900 DTM

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 15. PROFIBUS Device Integration Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

ABB FDT Shared Components

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB FDT Base Container

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB Fieldbus Builder PH

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB PROFIBUS Device Integration Library

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

PROFIBUS DTM Builder

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 14. HART Device Integration Node Types (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 47: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 47

ABB S800 DTM

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

ABB S900 DTM

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 16. 800xA for Advant Master Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA for Advant Master

X X1 X X X X X X X X2 X3 X X

NOTES:1. Deploy 800xA for Advant Master services and RTA support only in Connectivity Server nodes that are used for

800xA for Advant Master. Do not combine with other connect services on the same Connectivity Server node, except for 800xA for SafeGuard.

2. 800xA for Advant Master can be deployed in node types AS + CS, but only using the manual installation. 3. 800xA for Advant Master connect services must not be deployed in node types AS + CS + AO.

Table 17. 800xA for DCI Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA for DCI Server

X1

800xA for DCI Client

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

NOTE:1. Must not be combined with other connect servers on the same Connectivity Server node.

Table 15. PROFIBUS Device Integration Node Types (Continued)

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Page 48: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

48 3BSE034678R4101

Table 18. 800xA for Harmony Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA for Harmony Server

X1,2

800xA for Harmony Client

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

800xA for Harmony Configuration Server

A3 A3

NOTES:1. Must not be combined with other connect servers on the same Connectivity Server node.2. A Batch Client must not be installed on the same node as the 800xA for Harmony Server.3. The 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server should be installed only once either in one separate Application

Server, or in one of the Connectivity Servers that run the 800xA for Harmony Server. It must not be combined with other connect servers on the same Connectivity Server node. The 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server must be installed and activated before any 800xA for Harmony Server is installed.

Table 19. 800xA for Melody Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA for Melody Server

X1,2

800xA for Melody Client

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

800xA for Melody Configuration Server

X1,3

NOTES:1. Must not be combined with other connect servers on the same Connectivity Server node.2. A Batch Client must not be installed on the same node as the 800xA for Melody Server.3. On one server only. The 800xA for Melody Configuration Server must be installed and activated before any 800xA

for Melody Server is installed.

Page 49: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 49

Table 20. 800xA for MOD 300 Node Types1

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA for MOD 300 Server and PAS 2

X3,4

800xA for MOD 300 Client 2

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

NOTES:1. A switch distinguishes between client and server install.2. 800xA for MOD 300 must not be installed on a Windows 2000 Server node.3. Must not be combined with other connect servers on the same Connectivity Server node.4. A maximum of three (redundant pairs of) 800xA for MOD 300 Servers are supported.

Table 21. PLC Connect Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

PLC Connect1 X X X X X X X X X X X XNOTE:1. The software is installed on all nodes, but the Connectivity Services must only be deployed in Connectivity Servers

that are used for PLC Connect.

Table 22. 800xA for Safeguard Node Types1

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

800xA for SafeGuard

X X X X X X X X X X X X

NOTE:1. Requires 800xA for Advant Master.

Page 50: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

50 3BSE034678R4101

Table 23. Engineering Studio Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Always install and enable the following software.Topology Designer

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Engineering Platform

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Customized MSSQL Desktop Engine

X X X X

Install and enable the following software if Standard Engineering Tools is selected.

Function Designer

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Install and enable the following software if Professional Engineering Tools is selected.

Reuse Assistant

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Script Manager

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Aspect Express

X1 X

Process Engineering Tool Integration2,3

X1 X1 X1 X

NOTES:1. Only when used as an Engineering Workplace.2. Install only on one node per system.3. Process Engineering Tool Integration installation is not included in this instruction. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA -

Engineering, Process Engineering Tool Integration, Installation.

Page 51: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 1 Installation Planning System Configurations

3BSE034678R4101 51

Table 24. Asset Optimization Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

AO Server X1,2 X1,3 X1

Asset Optimization Client

X X X X X X X X X X

PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server

X4 X4 X4 X

PC, Network and Software Monitoring Client

X X5 X X X X X X X X5 X5 X

NOTES:1. The AO Server installation includes the Asset Optimization Client.2. Multiple (nonredundant) AO Servers are allowed; however, one and only must be configured as the AO Main Server.3. Must be configured as the AO Main Server.4. Run only on one Connectivity Server, nonredundant.5. Do not install in the node where the server component is installed. The server includes the client.

Table 25. Production Management Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

Batch Server X1,2 X1 X1

Batch Client X X X X X X X X X XMM Server X X

MM Client X X X X X X X X X X X X XNOTES:1. Includes Batch Client.2. An install option must be selected to identify the Primary and Secondary Batch Server node.

Page 52: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

System Configurations Section 1 Installation Planning

52 3BSE034678R4101

Table 26. Information Management Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

IM Server X X XIM Client2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Desktop Tools X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 XNOTE:1. Information Management Desktop Tools are intended for office desktop clients, and are normally not installed on

800xA System nodes except for engineering.2. The SoftPoint Server must be installed on all IM Client nodes.

Table 27. 800xA for TRIO Node Types

Software

Node Type

DS AS CS

Application ServerRemote Client Server

Client

Combined Nodes

Batch MM IM AO OtherAS + CS

AS + CS + AO

Batch+ IM +

MM

Single Node Eng

TRIO1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1

Hardware Definition Files2

Firmware3

NOTES:1. The AC 800M software must be installed and the AC800M Connect system extension must be loaded prior to

installing 800xA for TRIO software and loading its system extension. This instruction does not contain installation procedures for 800xA for TRIO. Refer to Industrial IT - 800xA System, Post Installation Setup for all procedures related to 800xA for TRIO.

2. The hardware definition files must be manually loaded onto each and every Control Builder M project that uses 800xA for TRIO.

3. Before beginning any configuration activities, be sure that the latest firmware is installed on the controller and the CI862.

Page 53: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 53

Section 2 General Installation Procedures

Introduction

The Industrial IT 800xA System software is supplied on DVDs as described in Appendix D, Installation Media. ABB recommends installing software on a node-by-node basis according to the instructions in this section.

If virus checking software is installed, disable it while installing 800xA System software.

Some of the third party software listed in the procedures in this section may or may not need installed depending on the Windows Operating System selected. Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software for lists of third party software, the version required for the operating system selected, how they are obtained, and whether or not they are installed with the operating system.

The different nodes and components to install on them are presented in tabular form in System Configurations on page 36.

The AC 800M software must be installed and the AC800M Connect system extension must be loaded prior to installing 800xA for TRIO software and loading its system extension. This instruction does not contain installation procedures for 800xA for TRIO. Refer to Industrial IT - 800xA System, Post Installation Setup for all procedures related to 800xA for TRIO.

Page 54: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

800xA Installation Wizard Section 2 General Installation Procedures

54 3BSE034678R4101

800xA Installation WizardMost 800xA installations begin with the 800xA Installation Wizard. The Welcome dialog of the Wizard (Figure 2 shows a typical example) provides common options that will not be repeated throughout this instruction. They are:

• Generate log file: To specify that a log file be generated for this installation (recommended), select the check box.

• Copy To Server: this function is not supported in the manual installation described in this instruction.

• Browse: allows browsing the contents of the installation media.

• Exit: closes the setup program.

• Home: returns to the original installation screen.

Most procedures indicate to follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. The procedure will include guidelines on what to select or fill in when

TC05752A

Figure 2. 800xA Installation Wizard Welcome Dialog (Typical)

Page 55: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 2 General Installation Procedures Installation Sequence

3BSE034678R4101 55

specific dialogs appear. Common dialogs such as License Agreement dialogs, Start Copying Files dialogs, Destination Location dialogs, etc. will not be mentioned.

Installation Sequence

Perform the following steps in order to install the 800xA System:

1. Plan and set up network and domain topology. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration.

2. Plan the system according to the configuration rules as specified in Configuration Rules on page 33.

Unless otherwise specified, choose the default installation location in the Destination Location dialogs.

Unless otherwise specified, enter your name and company name in the Registration dialogs.

Unless otherwise specified, when a dialog asks if you are installing the product for yourself or anyone who uses the computer, select Anyone who uses this computer.

Before starting any installation activities, verify the hardware meets the requirements for the node type. Refer to Third Party Hardware Products Verified for Industrial IT System 800xA for a list of hardware verified for use with the 800xA System. This document can be accessed from ABB Solutions Bank at:

http://solutionsbank.us.abb.com/

Make a disk image of each node after the operating system and all third party software is installed. For some applications, especially Information Management, it is important to make a disk image of each disk that holds configuration and/or application data. For example, the history database may be distributed on two or more disks.

Make another, separate disk image of the node after all 800xA System software has been installed and post installation setup procedures have been performed (refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup).

Page 56: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Sequence Section 2 General Installation Procedures

56 3BSE034678R4101

3. Refer to Table 28 and perform the applicable steps as needed. When using Table 28, adhere to the following:

a. The various product subcomponents are not listed in Table 28. Use Table 7 through Table 27 listed under System Configurations on page 36 to decide which components are to be installed on each node type listed in Table 28.

b. The table lists only the actions that are described in this instruction. There may be other software that needs to be installed that are described in third party instructions. Refer to Section 1, Installation Planning.

c. Perform the procedures in Table 28 for each node by going from top to bottom, left to right. Perform only the procedures applicable to the planned system. The Page Ref column provides the page the applicable procedure appears on.

d. Follow the instructions given in each procedure.

e. Return to Table 28 after each procedure is complete and go to the next applicable procedure.

4. When finished installing all software on all node types, refer to Licensing and Post Installation on page 60.

Table 28. General Installation Sequence

Page Ref Install Task

Sequence1

DC AS CSAS +

CS

AS + CA + AO

ClientSingle Node Eng

App Server

Batch/IM/MM

Remote Client/Server

62 Windows OS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

69 IIS — 2 2 2 2 — 2 2 2 2

71 Windows SPs 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3

72 Network Adapters 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 4

74 Domain Controller and DNS

4 — — — — — — — — —

78 Configure Domain Users and Groups

5 — — — — — — — — —

Page 57: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 2 General Installation Procedures Installation Sequence

3BSE034678R4101 57

82 Add Node to Domain — 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5 5

84 Add 800xA Service User and Installing User Accounts to Local Administrator Group

— 6 6 6 6 5 6 6 6 6

85 IE — 7 7 7 7 6 7 7 7 7

86 DirectX — 8 8 8 8 7 8 8 8 8

87 .NET Framework — 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9

88 Enable SNMP Service — — 10 10 10 — — — — —

89 Word — 10 11 11 11 9 10 10 10 10

89 Excel — 11 12 12 12 10 11 11 11 11

90 FrontPage — — — — — — — 12 12 —

90 Visual BASIC + SP — 12 13 13 13 11 12 13 13 12

91 MSXML — 13 14 14 14 12 13 14 14 13

92 SQL Server — 14 15 15 15 13 14 15 15 14

98 MDAC — 15 16 16 16 14 15 16 16 15

99 Acrobat Reader 6 16 17 17 17 15 16 17 17 16

99 Remote (thin) Client for Windows Server 2003

— — — — — — — — — 17

99 Remote (thin) Client for Windows 2000 Server

— — — — — — — — — 17

Table 28. General Installation Sequence

Page Ref Install Task

Sequence1

DC AS CSAS +

CS

AS + CA + AO

ClientSingle Node Eng

App Server

Batch/IM/MM

Remote Client/Server

Page 58: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Sequence Section 2 General Installation Procedures

58 3BSE034678R4101

DMS docs

DMS Client — 17 18 18 18 16 — 18 18 18

DMS Server — — — — 19 — — 19 19 —

AutoCAD docs

AutoCAD — 18 19 19 20 17 17 20 — 19

107 Central Licensing System (CLS)

— 19 20 20 21 18 18 21 20 20

117 RNRP 7 — — — — — — — — —

119 Process Portal and Basic System Functions

— 20 21 21 22 19 19 22 21 21

125 800xA Documentation 8 21 22 22 23 20 20 23 22 22

127 Diagnostics Collection Tool (DCT)

9 22 23 23 24 21 21 24 23 23

129 SMS and e-mail Messaging

— 23 24 24 25 22 22 25 24 24

Connectivity Software

131 AC 800M — 24 25 25 26 23 23 26 25 25

137 Foundation Fieldbus Device Integration

— 25 26 26 27 24 24 27 26 26

145 HART Device Integration

— 26 27 27 28 25 25 28 27 27

149 PROFIBUS Device Integration

— 27 28 28 29 26 26 29 28 28

153 800xA for Advant Master

— 28 29 29 30 27 27 30 29 29

159 800xA for DCI — 29 30 30 31 28 28 31 30 30

Table 28. General Installation Sequence

Page Ref Install Task

Sequence1

DC AS CSAS +

CS

AS + CA + AO

ClientSingle Node Eng

App Server

Batch/IM/MM

Remote Client/Server

Page 59: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 2 General Installation Procedures Installation Sequence

3BSE034678R4101 59

Connectivity Software (continued)

163 800xA for Harmony

— 30 31 31 32 29 29 32 31 31

179 800xA for Melody — 31 32 32 33 30 30 33 32 32

203 800xA for MOD 300

— 32 33 33 34 31 31 34 33 33

211 PLC Connect — 33 34 34 35 32 — 35 34 34

213 800xA for Safeguard

— 34 35 35 36 33 32 36 35 35

800xA System Software

215 Engineering Studio

— 35 36 36 37 34 33 37 36 36

227 Asset Optimization

— 36 37 37 38 35 34 38 37 37

234 PC, Network and Software Monitoring

— 37 38 38 39 36 35 39 38 38

241 Batch Management

— 38 39 39 40 37 36 40 39 39

243 Manufacturing Management

— 39 40 40 41 38 37 41 40 40

247 Information Management

— 40 41 41 42 39 38 42 41 41

263 Licensing 800xA System Software

10 41 42 42 43 40 39 43 42 42

NOTE:1. The 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server must be installed and activated before any 800xA for Harmony

Server is installed. The 800xA for Melody Configuration Server must be installed and activated before any 800xA for Melody Server is installed.

Table 28. General Installation Sequence

Page Ref Install Task

Sequence1

DC AS CSAS +

CS

AS + CA + AO

ClientSingle Node Eng

App Server

Batch/IM/MM

Remote Client/Server

Page 60: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Licensing and Post Installation Section 2 General Installation Procedures

60 3BSE034678R4101

Licensing and Post InstallationWhen finished installing all prerequisite and 800xA System software, install the software license keys and perform all applicable post installation procedures for all node types. These procedures are covered in:

• Section 25, Licensing 800xA System Software.• Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

Hot fixes for third party prerequisites that the 800xA System software has been found to be compatible with are listed in the tables in Appendix A, Third Party Software.

Page 61: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 61

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

Introduction

This section provides instructions for installing the Windows operating system and other prerequisite software for the 800xA System. Additional application specific prerequisites may be required when you install software for the various functional areas such as Engineering with Engineering Studio, Production Management, and Information Management. These application specific prerequisites are described in the applicable section for the functional area, and installed according to the instructions there.

The installer performing the procedures in this section must be proficient in the use of Windows Operating Systems. This section will not include detailed procedures on how to make the described settings.

There may be differences in accessing the Microsoft Operating System settings described in this section depending on the selected operating system. It is the responsibility of the user to consult Microsoft documentation and online help to accurately make the settings.

Hot fixes for third party prerequisites that the 800xA System software has been found to be compatible with are listed in the tables in Appendix A, Third Party Software.

It is recommended to make a full backup of all disks. With such a backup all work will be saved in the event of a disk crash or other serious malfunction. Make sure to place proper identification on the backup media or backup files.

Install optional hardware drivers if not supplied by the Windows operating system (video card, network card (if installed), sound card, etc.).

Page 62: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Windows Operating System Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

62 3BSE034678R4101

Windows Operating SystemThis section describes:

• Selecting the Windows Operating System on page 62.• Considerations for Disks and File System on page 62.• Windows Installation Guidelines on page 63.• Miscellaneous Windows Setup on page 66.

Selecting the Windows Operating System

800xA System software may be installed on Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000 Server, or Windows XP Professional.

Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server must be used for the following applications:

• Domain Controller.• Batch Server.• AO Server.• IM Server.• Harmony Connectivity Server.• Harmony Configuration Server.• Melody Connectivity Server.• Systems with more than 10 nodes - Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server

2003 must be installed on all Aspect, Connectivity, and Application Servers in systems where there are more than 10 nodes.

Windows XP Professional may be used in most other instances, although some performance benefits may be gained by using Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server. If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server is not required, then Windows XP Professional is generally recommended as it is easier to install.

This software may be purchased from any Microsoft reseller.

Considerations for Disks and File System

Windows installation is fairly simple; however, there are several factors that may have an impact on system performance, for example: where the software is installed, the tendency toward fragmentation, and the file system. The following are some recommendations regarding these factors.

Page 63: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Windows Installation Guidelines

3BSE034678R4101 63

Disks

It is generally recommended to use the Windows default location, the program folder on the boot disk, for installation.

Fragmentation

Make sure the file system is in a consistent state at all times. Defragmentation software should be executed on a regular basis using the built-in defragmentation software.

Even though server components keep most of their data in cache, it is fairly disk intensive. Thus they may benefit from RAID 5 systems.

File System

The 800xA System requires the NTFS file system. In addition to the partition where the Windows operating system and system software is installed, a dedicated NTFS partition is also needed for:

• Historical data storage - if Information Management is installed.• Batch Management data if this function is installed.

A FAT32 partition may be required if using certain disk imaging utilities; however, most disk imaging software now supports FAT32 or NTFS.

Windows Installation Guidelines

Make a fresh installation of the Windows operating system and applicable service pack. Follow the installation procedure as described in the documentation provided by Microsoft.

A faster disk subsystem will improve performance.

Page 64: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Windows Installation Guidelines Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

64 3BSE034678R4101

Table 29 indicates the settings specifically required for the 800xA System installation.

The U.S. English version of the operating system is required.

Table 29. Windows Installation Requirements for 800xA System

Step Description

Licensing for Windows 2000 Server

If using Windows 2000 Server, make sure the windows licensing is set to PER SEAT not PER CLIENT.

Licensing for Windows Server 2003

If using Windows Server 2003, make sure the windows licensing is set to Per Device or Per User.

Choosing a partition for installing the operating system.

It is recommended to delete any previous partitions and create a new partition on which to install the Windows operating system. This partition MUST use the NTFS file system.

If installing the IM Server function on this node, create a second partition using the NTFS file system for storing historical data. Create another separate NTFS partition for Batch Server if installing that function. These partitions may be on the same drive as the operating system, or on a separate drive (recommended).

If planning on creating disk images on this computer, a FAT32 partition may be required if using certain disk imaging utilities; however, most disk imaging software now supports FAT32 or NTFS.

Selecting Regional Settings • US English Locale (select the Advanced tab (Windows XP Professional and Server 2003), or click Set Default (Windows 2000 Server) and select US English.

• Ensure the decimal symbol is specified as a dot (.)

• Add the US English Input locale (keyboard type).

• Set the short date format to MM/DD/YYYY on the Date tab.

Page 65: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Windows Installation Guidelines

3BSE034678R4101 65

It is recommended to reboot from the Windows installation CD to begin the Windows operating system installation.

1. Insert the applicable CD in the CD drive.

2. Restart the computer.

3. When the prompt to open the reboot menu is displayed, press the applicable function key to display the menu (function key varies per computer model).

4. From the reboot menu, select the option for rebooting from the Windows installation CD.

5. When the Windows Setup screen is displayed, select the option for starting Windows Setup now (complete installation, DO NOT select the option for repairing an existing installation).

6. Follow the installation wizard, and use Table 29 to choose the correct options for the 800xA System when applicable.

Time Zone Make sure the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is selected (if daylight saving time is used).

Network Settings Select Typical Network settings.

Domains Choose not to put the node in a domain, even if this is a requirement. This will be done later.

Configure the Server This is only applicable for Windows 2000 Server. In this case, when the installation is completed, log on as Administrator. Then, in the Configure Your Server Wizard, select the option for configuring the server later, click Next, and then close the wizard.

Manage the Server This is only applicable for Windows Server 2003. In this case, when the installation is completed, log on as Administrator. Then, in the Manage Your Server Wizard, select the option to Don’t Display..., click Next, and then close the wizard.

Table 29. Windows Installation Requirements for 800xA System (Continued)

Step Description

Page 66: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Miscellaneous Windows Setup Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

66 3BSE034678R4101

Miscellaneous Windows Setup

The following settings are required for use with the 800xA System:

• Configuration of Virtual Memory on page 66.• Miscellaneous Windows Settings on page 66.• Disable Energy Saver and Screen Saver on page 67.• Disable Windows Firewall on page 67.• Disable Web Browser Popup Blocker on page 67.• Disable Automatic Updates on page 67.• Disable Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (Windows Server

2003) on page 68.• Disable Hyperthreading on page 68 (for Connectivity Servers with a Real Time

Accelerator Board (RTAB) installed, and PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server).

• Change Local Security Policy on Windows XP Professional SP2 on page 68.

Configuration of Virtual Memory

For client nodes, set the virtual memory to at least 1.5 GB. For server nodes, a correct configuration of virtual memory can enhance performance considerably. As a rule of thumb the size of pagefile.sys should be physical RAM x 2.5 or at least 1.5 GB. As another rule of thumb, if one more disk or partition exists, put the pagefile.sys there. After installation and starting up the nodes, use standard Windows procedures, via Windows Task Manager, to verify that the virtual memory being used is less than the configured value of the virtual memory.

Miscellaneous Windows Settings

To prevent CPU intensive redrawing of the window, uncheck Show Window Contents while dragging in the Display Properties dialog.

Increase the size of the System Log to five megabytes for Windows 2000 Server. Use the Event Viewer in Administrative Tools to make the change. Windows Server 2003 defaults to 16 megabytes.

Page 67: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Miscellaneous Windows Setup

3BSE034678R4101 67

Disable Energy Saver and Screen Saver

It is recommended to NOT have any Energy Saving and screen saver functionality activated on 800xA System nodes (especially operator Workplace Clients), as this might lead to longer reaction times in case of an emergency. If the computer BIOS has an Energy Saver configuration, configure it on a node-by-node basis. The Windows energy saving data is user dependent.

The energy saving setting may be accessed in two ways. The BIOS setup is available whenever the computer is powered up. It may also be accessed via Power Options in Windows control panel. The screen saver may be turned off in the Display Properties option in Windows Control Panel.

Disable Windows Firewall

1. If the selected Windows Operating System comes with a Windows Firewall component, it must be disabled. Select:

Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall

2. Select Off under the General tab and click OK.

Disable Web Browser Popup Blocker

Some third party software may offer a web browser popup blocker. Do not use them with the thin client portions of the integrated applications (specifically Asset Optimization), since these applications open child window browsers to display application data for the user. If a popup blocker is being used on a web browser, disable it during use of these web based applications.

Disable Automatic Updates

1. If the selected Windows Operating System comes with an Automatic Updates component, it must be disabled. Select:

Start > Control Panel > Automatic Updates

2. Select Turn off Automatic Updates and click OK.

Refer to Windows Service Packs on page 71 and make sure all Windows Operating System Service Packs are installed in order to access this functionality.

Refer to Windows Service Packs on page 71 and make sure all Windows Operating System Service Packs are installed in order to access this functionality.

Page 68: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Miscellaneous Windows Setup Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

68 3BSE034678R4101

Disable Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (Windows Server 2003)

If Windows Server 2003 is selected, disable Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration.

Disable Hyperthreading

Hyperthreading and dual processing must be disabled on PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server nodes and/or Connectivity Server nodes with a Real Time Accelerator Board (RTAB) installed (800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for MOD 300). If this is not done before loading the Windows Operating System, a complete reinstall of the operating system will be required for Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP Professional.

Refer to the computer vendor documentation for instructions on disabling hyperthreading.

Change Local Security Policy on Windows XP Professional SP2

In order to add a client to the 800xA System, the local security policy on Windows XP Professional SP2 must be changed.

1. Select:

Start > Control Panel

2. Double-click Administrative Tools.

3. Double-click Local Security Policy to open the Local Security Settings console.

4. Click Security Options in the Local Security Settings console tree in the left pane.

5. Double-click Network Access: Sharing and security model for local account in the right pane to open the Local Security Setting dialog.

6. Select Classic- local users authenticate as themselves in the drop-down list box.

7. Click Apply and then OK.

Refer to Windows Service Packs on page 71 and make sure all Windows Operating System Service Packs are installed in order to access this functionality.

Page 69: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Internet Information Services

3BSE034678R4101 69

Internet Information ServicesMicrosoft Internet Information Services (IIS) are required on 800xA System nodes except client nodes and the Domain Server node. IIS is installed automatically as part of Windows 2000 Server. It must be installed separately for Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003.

Windows XP Professional

Use the Add/Remove Windows Components utility in the Windows Control Panel to check whether or not IIS is installed.

1. Select:

Start > Control Panel

2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs to open the Add or Remove Programs dialog.

3. Double-click Add/Remove Windows Components to open the Windows Component Wizard.

4. Check to see if the Internet Information Services (IIS) check box is selected.

a. If the check box is not selected, select it, click Next and follow the Wizard to complete the installation of the IIS components.

b. If the check box is selected, click Details to open the Internet Information Services (IIS) dialog and verify that all required components are installed.The following Internet Information Services check boxes must be selected: Common Files, Internet Services Manager (Server nodes only), and World Wide Web Service.

c. Select any required check boxes and click OK.

d. Click Next and follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

Select the Internet Information Services (IIS) check box to install all Internet Information Services components, or click Details to select just the required components.

Page 70: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Windows Server 2003 Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

70 3BSE034678R4101

Windows Server 2003

1. Select:

Start > Control Panel

2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs to open the Add or Remove Programs dialog.

3. Double-click Add/Remove Windows Components to open the Windows Component Wizard.

4. Check to see if the Application Server check box is selected.

a. If the check box is not selected, select it, click Next and follow the Wizard to complete the installation of the IIS components.

b. If the check box is selected, click Details to open the Internet Information Services (IIS) dialog and verify that all required components are installed.The following check boxes must be selected: ASP.NET, Enable network COM+ Access, and Internet Information Services (IIS).

c. Select any required check boxes and click OK.

d. Click Next and follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

5. On a fresh install of Windows Server 2003, IIS comes in lockdown mode, and is able to display only static HTML web pages. Make the following settings in order to allow 800xA functions to work properly on Windows Server 2003.

a. Select:

Start > Control Panel

b. Double-click Administrative Tools to open the Internet Information Services Manager shown in Figure 3.

c. Select Web Services Extensions in the left panel.

d. Select Active Server Pages in the right panel and select Allow.

e. Select Server Side Includes in the right panel and select Allow.

6. Select ASP.NET v1.1.4322 in the right panel and select Allow.

Select the Application Server check box to install all components, or click Details to select just the required components.

Page 71: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Windows Service Packs

3BSE034678R4101 71

Windows Service Packs

Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software to verify the Windows Operating Systems in the 800xA System include the listed service packs and hot fixes. If they do not, install them.

TC06065A

Figure 3. Internet Information Services Manager

If additional Windows Operating System components are installed after installing a Service Pack, it will be necessary to reinstall the Service Pack.

When installing Windows 2000 Server SP4, unless there are specific requirements, it is recommended to NOT Archive the files.

Page 72: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Network Adapters Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

72 3BSE034678R4101

Network AdaptersNetwork adapters must be installed and configured to support communication on the Ethernet network. This is required on the Domain Server node, and all 800xA System nodes. Typically one network adapter will be provided with the computer hardware. It may be necessary to install a second network adapter for redundancy.

All network adapters may be installed and configured at the same time during system installation; however, the network will not run with redundancy until Redundant Network Routing Protocol (RNRP) is installed (refer to Section 5, RNRP for the Domain Server node and Section 6, Process Portal and Basic System Functions for all other 800xA System nodes).

If the network adapters are not plug-and-play devices, the installation must be done manually. If the Windows installation does not include the drivers for the network adapters the driver software must be installed before the network adapters can be configured.

Configure TCP/IP settings for:

• IP address (required).• Subnet mask (required).• DNS (required for network adapters for the Client/Server Network).• Default gateway (if required by topology).

Use standard Windows procedures to configure the network adapters. When doing so:

• Select the Show icon in task bar when connected check box to simplify network installation and fault tracing.

• Enter the IP address and the subnet mask according to the planning done in Table 3 on page 26.

The 800xA System relies on TCP/IP as its transport protocol. It is strongly recommended that TCP/IP is the only protocol in use. If other protocols need to be installed, make sure that TCP/IP is configured as the primary protocol.

Refer to Windows Help > Networking for information on how to install and configure TCP/IP network adapters.

Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration for configuration of DNS and NetBIOS.

Page 73: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Network Adapters

3BSE034678R4101 73

• Enter the IP address of the Primary Domain Server in Preferred DNS server on the Primary Client/Server Network.

• Enter the IP address of the Secondary Domain Server in Alternate DNS server.

• Repeat for all network adapters in the computer.

• For the adapters for the Secondary Network Client/Server, set the DNS Settings opposite to the settings for the corresponding primary network so that the Secondary Domain Server is entered as Preferred DNS server and the Primary Domain Server is entered as Alternate DNS server.

• If the computer has more network adapters than there are Domain Servers in the system it is sufficient that the DNS server parameters are entered on the first network adapters.

• For the secondary Client/Server Network and for all interfaces for Control Networks, two special configuration changes (compared to the default settings) must also be done under the Advanced section for the network adapters. For example, if there are two Domain Servers, a Connectivity Server with four network adapters (redundant Client/Server Network plus redundant Control Network) will have DNS Servers configured for the two network adapters for the Client/Server Network but not for the network adapters for the control network.

– Disable Register this connections addresses in DNS. The interfaces, for which the automatic DNS registration is disabled, will be entered manually in the reverse lookup zone in the DNS Server. Refer to Add nodes in the DNS Reverse Lookup Zone for the Secondary Network on page 83.

– Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP as shown. Only the Primary Client Server uses NetBIOS.

7. Connect the Ethernet cables. Match each of the icons with its corresponding Ethernet connector on the computer.

Always specify the Domain Servers with their primary network addresses. This is true for all network adapters - also the ones for secondary networks.

Page 74: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Domain Controller and DNS Server Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

74 3BSE034678R4101

8. Use ping and nslookup to verify the computer has contact with the Domain Controller:

C:\>ping 172.16.4.1Pinging 172.16.4.1 with 32 bytes of data:Reply from 172.16.4.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=64...C:\>nslookup client1 (the name of this computer)Server: dc1.mydomain.comAddress: 172.16.4.1Name: client1.mydomain.comAddress: 172.16.4.91

Domain Controller and DNS ServerThis procedure is performed at the Domain Server, and is required for all 800xA Systems that use domains.

For a real installation of an 800xA System, set up a new Domain Server with a domain specifically for the 800xA System, that will exist independent of any other corporate domains that may already exist. Follow the procedure in this section, starting at Domain Setup Procedure on page 75.

Systems used only for engineering and testing may be set up in a different way:

• Set up a new Domain Server and domain specifically for the 800xA System, and integrate that domain into the corporate domain structure. In this case it is only necessary to consult the corporate domain administrator in order to integrate the 800xA System domain into the corporate domain.

• Create a new domain for the 800xA System on an existing Domain Server. In this case, provide the domain administrator with the information in this section, and in Users and Groups on page 78. The administrator will require this information to create the new domain and add the new domain to the existing Domain Controller. The nodes may then be added to that domain as described in Adding Nodes to a Domain on page 82.

The connection may not work via more than one network adapter before RNRP is installed.

Verify the port speed and duplex configuration on both ends (Network Adapter and network switch). Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration.

Page 75: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Domain Controller and DNS Server

3BSE034678R4101 75

• Join the 800xA System nodes to an existing domain. In this case, provide the domain administrator with the information in Users and Groups on page 78. The administrator can then create the users and groups required by the 800xA System domain. The nodes may then be added to that domain as described in Adding Nodes to a Domain on page 82.

Domain Setup Procedure

Perform this procedure at the computer that you have designated to be the Domain Server node.

Create a new domain by setting up a new Domain Controller and DNS server using the Active Directory Installation wizard. Run this wizard on the computer designated to be the Domain Server node.

To set up a new domain:

1. Configure the IP addresses of the Domain Server node if this is not already done. This procedure is described in Network Adapters on page 72.

– Set the IP addresses according to Planning and Preparation on page 26.

– Set the IP address of this computer as the Preferred DNS Server on the primary network adapter.

– If using, or planning on using two Domain Servers, set the IP address of the other Domain Server as the Alternate DNS Server on the primary network adapter.

– If using a redundant network, set the DNS settings on the secondary network adapter opposite to the settings on the primary network adapter.

Additional guidelines for setting up the 800xA System domain are provided in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration.

Before setting up a new domain, verify that the computer being used as the Domain Server has Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003 installed. Windows XP Professional can not be used for a Domain Controller or DNS server.

Ensure TCP/IP protocol is correctly installed on the computer.

Page 76: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Domain Controller and DNS Server Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

76 3BSE034678R4101

2. Select:

Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools

3. Click Configure Your Server.

4. Click Active Directory, and click Start to start the Active Directory Installation wizard.

5. Click Next.

6. In the Domain Controller Type dialog, select Domain Controller for new domain and click Next.

7. In the Create Tree or Child Domain dialog, select Create a new domain tree and click Next.

8. In the Create or Join Forest dialog, select Create a new forest of domain trees and click Next.

9. In the New Domain Name dialog, choose a proper name for the (still non-existing) domain and click Next.

10. In the NetBIOS Domain Name dialog, choose name and click Next.

11. In the Database and Log Locations dialog, click Next.

12. In the Shared System Volume dialog, click Next.

The Active Directory Installation wizard will automatically recognize a missing DNS server and install and configure the DNS service on the Domain Server node. For Active Directory, DNS is required.

13. Click OK.

14. In the Configure DNS dialog, select Yes install and configure DNS on the computer.

15. Click Next.

16. In the Permissions dialog, choose compatible only with Win2000. (This is to maximize security.) Click Next.

Page 77: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Domain Controller and DNS Server

3BSE034678R4101 77

17. In the Directory Service Restore Mode Admin Password dialog, specify a password.

18. Click Next.

19. In the Summary dialog, click Next. The installation wizard now executes the Configuring Active Directory... procedure.

20. At completion of Active Directory Installation, click Finish.

21. Choose to Restart Windows.

22. Check the DNS settings made by the Active Directory Wizard. Only the forward lookup zone has been created

23. Add a reverse lookup zone for the Primary Network. In the DNS configuration window mark Reverse Lookup Zones.

24. select New Zone... in the Action menu to start in the New Zone Wizard.

25. Click Next.

26. In the Reverse Lookup Zone dialog, enter the Network ID for the primary network for this computer; for example: 172.16.4 and click Next.

27. Click Finish to complete the New Zone Wizard.

28. Select the new zone and right-click to select Properties.

29. Change Allow Dynamic Updates? to either Yes or Only Secure Updates and click OK.

30. If there is a redundant network, repeat Step 23 through Step 28 to add a Reverse Lookup Zone for the secondary network. Enter the network ID for the secondary network; for example: 172.17.4.0.

Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automation System Network, Design and Configuration, for verification.

If configuring just one Domain Controller, the configuration is complete. For redundant Domain Controllers repeat Step 1 through Step 20 on a second Windows Server node except that in Step 6, choose to install an Additional Domain Controller for an existing domain.

Remember this password. This is the password of the local Administrator on this node that will be used if the Domain Server is later demoted from being a Domain Controller to be a normal domain member computer.

Page 78: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Users and Groups Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

78 3BSE034678R4101

Users and Groups

This section describes how to create the Windows domain users and groups in the Active Directory on the Domain Server node.

This procedure requires being logged in as domain administrator. A default domain administrator is created when the Domain Controller and domain is set up as described in Domain Controller and DNS Server on page 74.

During the following procedure two (or more) domain accounts with administrator privileges will be created. One account will be reserved for use by 800xA System services (with the exception of 800xA for Harmony and 800xA for Melody). This account will NOT be used for installation, administration, configuration, or any other system related procedures. A second administrator account must be created and used to complete the 800xA System software installation and post installation procedures. Create other user accounts for other 800xA System activities such as application engineer, system engineer, and operator.

The various users and groups required by the 800xA System are described in Table 30. All groups/users must reside on the 800xA System domain.

This setup may be performed yourself, or the domain administrator may perform the setup. In either case, use the guidelines in Table 30, and follow the step-by-step procedures following Table 30.

Refer to Appendix C, Users, Groups, and Rights Assignments for listings of 800xA System default User Groups and Users.

Since the 800xA System user credential concept is built on Windows domains, local user accounts must never be created and used on the client nodes. Clients will always connect to the 800xA System using domain accounts. The only exception is for single node systems, Workgroups where domains are not used, 800xA for Harmony, and 800xA for Melody. In this case all users and groups are local.

Before setting up IndustrialIT users and user groups, verify that a domain has been created by setting up a Domain Controller and DNS server as described in Domain Controller and DNS Server on page 74.

Administrator users in the domain should also be added to the local administrator group on all 800xA System nodes.

Page 79: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites New Organizational Unit

3BSE034678R4101 79

New Organizational Unit

This organizational unit is not mandatory; however, it may be helpful to put all 800xA System groups and users into one container. To create a new unit:

1. Select:

Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Active Directory Users and Computers.

2. In the left pane, right-click on the newly created domain server name, and select:

New > Organizational Unit

from the context menu that appears.

3. Assign this organization unit the name Industrial IT.

Table 30. Domain Groups/Accounts Required by 800xA System

Groups/Users Description

IndustrialITAdmin Group Create the IndustrialITAdmin Group. All 800xA System administrators (including the 800xA Service User) must be a member of the IndustrialITAdmin group.

IndustrialITUser Group Create the IndustrialITUser Group. All 800xA System users must be a member of the IndustrialITUser group.

800xA Service User Create a new user for 800xA System services. Make this user a member of the IndustrialITAdmin Group, the IndustrialITUser Group, and the local administrator group on every system node.

All 800xA System services will run under this account. Make the name easy to recognize (for example: 800xAService).

Installing User Create a user for installing software, and performing system administration procedures. Make this user a member of the IndustrialITAdmin Group, the IndustrialITUser Group, and the local administrator group on every system node.

Other 800xA System users Create additional users for system configuration and operation. These users are added to the IndustrialITUser Group.

Page 80: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Groups Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

80 3BSE034678R4101

Groups

To create the required groups:

1. Right-click on the Industrial IT folder in the left pane and select:

New > Group

from the context menu that appears.

2. Use the New Object - group dialog to assign the group a name (for example, IndustrialITAdmin).

3. Set the Group scope to Global, and the Group type to Security.

4. Perform Step 1 through Step 3 for each of the two required groups:

– IndustrialITAdmin.– IndustrialITUser.

800xA Service User

Create the 800xA service user. This is the user account that all 800xA System services will run under. Make this new user a member of the following groups:

• IndustrialITAdmin group• IndustrialITUser group• Local Administrator group on every system node

To create this user:

1. Right-click on the Industrial IT organizational unit in the left pane and select:

New > User

from the context menu that appears.

This procedure assumes the Industrial IT organization unit has been created.

It is recommended to keep the default names of these groups. If using a Windows 2000 Domain Controller in mixed mode, limit the Windows group names to 20 characters or less.

This procedure assumes the Industrial IT organization unit has been created.

Page 81: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites User Account for Installation

3BSE034678R4101 81

2. In the New Object - User dialog specify the user name and login name. Make the name meaningful and easy to recognize (for example: 800xAService).

3. Click Next when finished.

4. Specify the user password. Select the Password never expires check box, and make sure the password for this user is NEVER CHANGED.

5. Click Next when finished with the password specification.

6. Click Finish in the next dialog to complete the user specification.

7. Make this user a member of the IndustrialITAdmin group.

a. Select the Industrial IT organizational unit in the left pane.

b. Right-click on the IndustrialITAdmin group in the right pane and choose Properties from the context menu that appears (or double-click the group name).

c. Select the Members tab in the Properties dialog.

d. Click Add. This displays the Select Users, Contacts, or Computers dialog.

e. Select the new user (for example, 800xAService) and click Add.

f. Repeat Step e to add other users to the IndustrialITAdmin group.

g. Click OK when finished.

h. Click OK on the Members tab of the Properties dialog.

8. Add this user to the local administrator group on every system node.

User Account for Installation

Create an administrator account for installing all 800xA System software and performing all post installation procedures. Follow the procedure for 800xA Service User on page 80. The only difference is that this account should be configured so that the password will expire, and will need to be changed periodically.

In order to limit the abilities of the service user the user may be included in the Deny Logon Locally policy on every system node.

Page 82: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Other Users Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

82 3BSE034678R4101

Other Users

Add other IndustrialIT users and make them members of the IndustrialIT User group. Set passwords according to company policy, and change them frequently.

Adding Nodes to a DomainThis is required for all member nodes in the 800xA System (not applicable for single node installations, for example Information Management consolidation node, or workgroups). Perform this procedure at each node that needs to be added to the domain.

1. Log on to the node as a local administrator.

2. Configure the IP address of this node as described in Network Adapters on page 72. Make sure the DNS server address points to the IP address of the DNS server.

3. From the desktop, right-click on My Computer and choose Properties from the context menu that appears.

4. For Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP Professional, perform Step 5 through Step 7. For Windows 2000 Server, perform Step 8 through Step 13.

5. Select the Computer Name tab and click Network ID.

6. This launches the Network Identification Wizard. Follow the Wizard to add the node to the domain. A domain administrator user name and password is required during this procedure.

7. Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to add additional nodes to the domain. This completes the procedure for Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP Professional.

8. Select the Network Identification tab and click Properties.

9. Configure the Network Identification:

a. In the Computer Name text field enter the node name.

b. Select this node to be a Member of Domain.

This procedure requires an administrator user name and password defined for the domain. Have this information available before proceeding.

Page 83: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Add nodes in the DNS Reverse Lookup Zone for the Secondary

3BSE034678R4101 83

c. Enter the domain name that was set up in Domain Controller and DNS Server on page 74.

d. Click OK.

10. Enter the domain user name and password and click OK. This displays the message indicating the node has been added to the domain.

11. Click OK to acknowledge this message. This will display another message indicating that a reboot is required for the changes to take affect.

12. Restart the node.

13. Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 and Step 8 through Step 12 to add additional nodes to the domain.

Add nodes in the DNS Reverse Lookup Zone for the Secondary Network

This is required if a Redundant Client/Server Network is used. Perform this for all nodes including the Domain Server nodes themselves (not applicable for single-node installations, for example Information Management consolidation node), or Workgroups). Perform this procedure on the Domain Server node for each node in the domain.

Since Register this connection’s address in DNS is enabled for the primary network, the primary network address is automatically entered in both the Forward and Reverse Lookup Zones when the node communicates with the Domain Server node for the first time.

The secondary network address should be registered in the Reverse Lookup Zone but not in the Forward Lookup Zone. To achieve this, Register this connection’s address in DNS is disabled for the secondary network and the registration in the Reverse Lookup Zone must be done manually on the Domain Server node:

1. Select:

Start > Programs > Administrative Tools

2. Click DNS.

3. Select the Reverse Lookup Zone for the secondary network.

4. From the Action menu, select New Pointer and enter the IP address for the secondary network adapter. Only the last digit can be entered.

Page 84: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Adding 800xA Domain Users to the Local Administrator Group Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

84 3BSE034678R4101

5. Enter the Host Name.

OR AS AN ALTERNATIVE: click Browse and then:

a. Select the Domain Controller and then select Forward Lookup Zone.

b. Select the Host entry for this node.

c. Click OK.

6. Click OK.

Adding 800xA Domain Users to the Local Administrator Group

The 800xA Service User and 800xA Installing User accounts defined in the domain must be added to the local Administrator group on each node in the domain, except the Domain Server node.

1. Log on as a local administrator.

2. Right-click My Computer on the Windows desktop and select Manage from the context menu that appears.

3. The Computer Management dialog appears. Browse to the local Administrator Group as shown in Figure 4.

4. Double-click on Administrators to open the Administrators Properties dialog.

5. Click Add. This opens the Select Users or Groups dialog.

6. Select the domain in the Look In drop-down list box.

7. Enter the user name and password for an administrator account in the domain.

8. Select the 800xAService and 800xAInstall users and click Add.

9. When the dialog indicates the users have been added, click OK.

10. To finish, click OK in the Administrator Users dialog.

This procedure will require the user name and password of an administrator user in the domain to be entered.

Page 85: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Internet Explorer

3BSE034678R4101 85

Internet Explorer

Internet Explorer must be installed on all nodes. This software is supplied with Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003. Refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software to see the current required version and whether Internet Explorer needs to be installed or if it was installed with the operating system.

The installation software (ie6setup.exe) is located in the following folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1:

System 1\Software\Microsoft\IE6

When installing Internet Explorer, select Install Internet Explorer 6 and Internet tools and use the default choices for all other options. Refer to the installation procedure described in the documentation provided by Microsoft.

Figure 4. Computer Management Dialog

For hot fixes related to Internet Explorer that the 800xA System software has been found to be fully compatible and functional with at the time of system release, refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software.

Page 86: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

DirectX Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

86 3BSE034678R4101

After installation (and restart of node), configure Internet Explorer. Double-click the Internet Explorer icon and in the Wizard select:

• I want to set up my IE connection manually or (LAN).• I connect through a local network (LAN).• Remove Automatic discovery of proxy server.

• Specify No Mail account.

To verify the installation, start Internet Explorer from the Start menu.

DirectXAll 800xA System nodes, except the Domain Server node, require DirectX. Use the DirectX Diagnostic Tool to determine the version of DirectX:

1. Select:

Start > Run

2. In the Run dialog, enter:

dxdiag

and click OK.

3. Select the System tab.

4. Under the DirectX Files tab, check the version for each DirectX file.

5. When finished checking the version click Exit. If the version is not the one specified in Appendix A, Third Party Software, continue the procedure to install the software.

The following settings may differ slightly depending on the operating system.

If a proxy configuration is required, enable Automatic discovery of proxy server and Bypass proxy server for local addresses.

Some 800xA System features require specific Internet Explorer settings. Refer to 800xA Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup for details.

If Windows can not find the dxdiag program, DirectX version 5.0 or earlier is installed. Skip to Step 6 to install the version of DirectX specified in Appendix A, Third Party Software.

Page 87: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites .NET Framework

3BSE034678R4101 87

6. The installation software (dxsetup.exe) is located in the following folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1:

System 1\Software\Microsoft\DirectX9

7. To install the software, follow the documentation provided by Microsoft.

.NET Framework

All 800xA System nodes, except the Domain Server node, require .NET Framework. All steps must be completed in order.

1. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the following folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1:

System1\Software\Microsoft

2. Double-click:

dotnetfx.exe

to install .NET Framework 1.0.

3. Double-click:

NDP1.0sp3-KB867461-X86-Enu.exe

to install SP3 for .NET Framework 1.0.

4. Double-click:

dotnetfx1_1.exe

to install .NET Framework 1.1.

5. Double-click:

NDP1.1sp1-KB867460-X86.exe

to install SP1 for .NET Framework 1.1.

.NET Framework 1.1 is installed with Windows Server 2003. .NET Framework 1.0 must be installed manually.

Page 88: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Enable SNMP Service Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

88 3BSE034678R4101

Enable SNMP ServiceThis procedure is only required on PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server nodes.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) services are required by the PC, Network and Software Monitoring software to enable PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server nodes to communicate with remote devices that support SNMP.

To enable SNMP services in the node in which the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server software will be installed:

1. Select:

Start > Control Panel

2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs to launch the Add or Remove Programs utility.

3. Click Add/Remove Windows Components to open the Windows Components Wizard.

4. Select Management and Monitoring Tools.

5. Click Details to open the Management and Monitoring Tools dialog.

6. Select the Simple Network Management Protocol check box.

7. Click Next to complete the installation.

8. Insert the 800xA System Installation DVD into the drive.

9. Use Windows Explorer to locate wmisnmp.exe in the following directory:

System1\Software\Microsoft

10. Double-click wmisnmp.exe to begin the installation.

If installing on a node running Windows 2000 Server, the Windows installation CD will be required.

On nodes running Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, a WMI SNMP Provider check box is also available. Select this check box as well.

The procedure is complete for nodes running Windows XP or Windows Server 2003. Continue with the procedure if installing on node running Windows 2000 Server, as the WMI SNMP Provider did not get installed.

Page 89: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Microsoft Word

3BSE034678R4101 89

11. The WMI SNMP Provider Installation Wizard dialog appears.

12. Click Next to continue.

13. Click Finish to complete the installation.

Microsoft WordMicrosoft Word, which is part of the Microsoft Office Professional Suite, must be installed on all nodes where the following functions will be used:

• Engineering Studio - Engineering Platform (for Document Manager Functions).

• Control Builder M (for Project Documentation Functions).

This software is available from any Microsoft reseller. Follow the installation procedure described in the documentation provided by Microsoft.

To achieve Security Level Medium, after installation of Microsoft Word and before continuing installing or working on the Engineering Platform, start up Microsoft Word and, from the menu bar, select:

Tools > Macro > Security

and check Security Level Medium. Repeat this for every Industrial IT User on every node.

For hot fixes related to Microsoft software that the 800xA System software has been found to be fully compatible and functional with at the time of system release, refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software.

Microsoft ExcelMicrosoft Excel, which is part of the Microsoft Office Professional Suite, must be installed on all nodes where the following functions will be used:

• Engineering Studio - Engineering Platform (for Bulk Data Manager Functions).

• Data Direct - Excel Data Access.

• Information Management.

Page 90: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Microsoft Office FrontPage Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

90 3BSE034678R4101

• AO Server.

This software is available from any Microsoft reseller. Follow the installation procedure described in the documentation provided by Microsoft.

To achieve Security Level Medium, after installation of Microsoft Excel and before continuing installing or working on the Engineering Platform, start up Microsoft Excel and, from the menu bar, select:

Tools > Macro > Security

and check Security Level Medium. Repeat this for every Industrial IT User on every node.

For hot fixes related to Microsoft software that the 800xA System software has been found to be fully compatible and functional with at the time of system release, refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software.

Microsoft Office FrontPageMicrosoft Office FrontPage must be installed on every node to be used to develop Manufacturing Management IForms. The IForm Developer node is used for the engineering of Intelligent Forms (IForms) and other configuration functions.

This software is available from any Microsoft reseller. Follow the installation procedure described in the documentation provided by Microsoft.

For hot fixes related to Microsoft software that the 800xA System software has been found to be fully compatible and functional with at the time of system release, refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software.

Visual BASIC 6 with SP6All nodes that use the Graphics Builder, and the Primary Aspect Server node need a Professional or Enterprise Edition of Visual BASIC 6.0 with Service Pack 6. Visual BASIC 6.0 must be purchased from ABB or from another vendor.

This includes IM Servers and remote clients, Operator Workplaces, and Thin Client Servers. Excel is optional for 800xA for Harmony and 800xA for Melody.

Page 91: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites MSXML

3BSE034678R4101 91

Follow the installation procedure provided with Visual BASIC. It is recommended to use the typical installation alternative for VB6. It is also recommended to use the default values when installing the Service Pack.

To install SP6 (after installing Visual BASIC):

1. Use Windows Explorer to locate Vs6sp6B.exe in the following directory on 800xA System Installation DVD 1:

System1\Software\Microsoft\VisualBasic ServicePack

2. Double-click Vs6sp6B.exe.

3. When a dialog appears asking where to place the extracted files, enter (or browse for) the desired location.

4. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the location specified in Step 3 and double-click setupsp6.exe to install the service pack.

To verify, start VB from the Start menu and verify that the Service Pack has been installed correctly by choosing About Microsoft Visual Basic... from the Help menu.

MSXMLMSXML Version 3.0 SP5 is included and installed with Windows XP Professional SP2. MSXML Version 3.0 SP7 is included and installed with Windows Server 2003. MSXML Version 3.0 SP4 is included with 800xA and must be manually installed for Windows 2000 Server. Install MSXML 3.0 with SP4 (msxml3usa.msi) on all system nodes running Windows 2000 Server. Install MSXML 4.0 with SP2 (msxml.msi) on all system nodes regardless of the operating system. This software is provided in the:

System1\Software\Microsoft

folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1.

Page 92: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

SQL Server 2000 Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

92 3BSE034678R4101

SQL Server 2000

SQL Server 2000 is required for the following software installations:

• Batch Management - Batch Server and Batch Client. Batch Clients require only the client components of SQL Server. This must be installed on all nodes where you install the Batch Client.

• Manufacturing Management - MM Server.

• 800xA for Harmony - Connectivity Servers and Configuration Servers.

• 800xA for Melody - Connectivity Servers and Config Servers.

This software is provided with 800xA System Installation DVD 2:

• System5 for SQL Server 2000 Standard or System6 for SQL Server 2000 Personal.

To install SQL Server 2000 for the Batch Server, MM Server, 800xA for Harmony, and 800xA for Melody:

• Install SQL Server 2000 as described in SQL Server 2000 Installation Procedure on page 93.

To install SQL Server 2000 for the Batch Client:

• Install SQL Server 2000 as described in SQL Server Installation (on Batch Clients) on page 95.

Refer to Table 9 on page 40 for information on which SQL Server components to install on the various 800xA System nodes and with which features.

Do not confuse SQL Server 2000 with Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine. SQL Server 2000 (described here) is required for 800xA for Harmony, 800xA for Melody, and Production Management. Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine is required for Engineering Studio.

After installing the SQL Server software (server and/or client component), install SQL Server service pack 3a (refer to SQL Server Service Pack 3a Installation on page 97) and Microsoft hotfix MS03-031.

Page 93: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites SQL Server 2000 Installation Procedure

3BSE034678R4101 93

SQL Server 2000 Installation Procedure

Refer to Table 9 on page 40 and install SQL Server 2000 as required. Before installing SQL Server 2000, ensure that the SystemLocale is set to English (United States). To do this:

1. From the desktop, right-click the Internet Explorer icon and select Properties from the context menu that appears.

2. Click Languages.

3. Ensure that English (United States) is in the language box.

To install the SQL Server 2000 software:

1. Log in as follows, depending on where SQL Server 2000 is being installed:

– If installing SQL Server 2000 for 800xA for Harmony Server (with or without a Batch Client), log in using the local service account. If this account has not been configured, do so now as described in Create Accounts and Users on page 163.

– If installing SQL Server 2000 for 800xA for Melody Connectivity Server or Config Server, log in using the local service account. If this account has not been configured, do so now as described in Create Accounts And Users on page 179.

– If installing SQL Server 2000 for Batch Server or Batch Client, or MM Server (except for Harmony or Melody Connectivity Server), log in with the 800xA Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

2. Install 800xA System Installation DVD 2 in the DVD drive.

3. Use Windows Explorer to locate autorun.exe in the following directory:

System5 for SQL Server 2000 Standard

-or-

System6 for SQL Server 2000 Personal

Refer to Table 9 on page 40 for information on which component goes on the various 800xA System nodes and with which features.

Page 94: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

SQL Server 2000 Installation Procedure Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

94 3BSE034678R4101

4. Double-click autorun.exe to begin the installation.

5. Select SQL Server 2000 Components.

6. Select Install Database Server.

7. Click Next in the welcome window.

8. Select the Local Computer installation option and click Next.

9. Select Create A New Instance Of SQL Server, Or Install Client Tools and click Next.

10. Enter the user information in the User Information dialog and click Next.

11. Click Yes to accept the license agreement.

12. Enter BWQYX-RKXP3-DYC33-DQ7VT-F6FHW when prompted for the SQL server license key number, and click Next.

13. Select Server And Client Tools and click Next.

14. Select the Default check box for the Instance Name and click Next.

15. Select Typical in the Setup Type window.

If the warning dialog shown in Figure 5 appears when installing SQL Server on a Windows Server 2003 node, ignore the message and click Continue.

Figure 5. SQL Server Warning Dialog (Windows Server 2003 Only)

Page 95: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites SQL Server Installation (on Batch Clients)

3BSE034678R4101 95

16. Configure the autostart properties of the SQL Server services as follows:

a. Select Use The Same Account For Each Service. Auto Start SQL Server Service in the Services Account window.

b. Select Use a Domain User Account.

c. Enter the user name and password of the 800xA domain service account (for Batch Management and Manufacturing Management) or local service account user (for 800xA for Harmony or Melody).

d. Click Next.

17. Select the Mixed Authentication Mode option (for 800xA for Melody, select Windows Authentication Mode) and click Next.

18. Select the Per Seat License mode and enter the number of devices (one per Workplace Client purchased). If not prompted to do so, change the licensing mode to Per Seat by doing the following steps:

a. Select:

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > SQL Server 2000 Licensing Setup

b. Select Per Seat for Licensing Mode.

c. Enter the number of devices.

19. Click Continue in the Start Copying Files window.

20. Click Finish.

SQL Server Installation (on Batch Clients)

Use the following steps to install the client components of SQL Server 2000 Standard software on batch client nodes, and all nodes where the Batch Client software is installed:

1. Install 800xA System Installation DVD 2 in the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate autorun.exe in the following directory:

System5

If the warning dialog shown in Figure 5 appears when installing SQL Server on a Windows Server 2003 node, ignore the message and click Continue.

Page 96: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

SQL Server Installation (on Batch Clients) Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

96 3BSE034678R4101

3. Double-click autorun.exe to begin the installation.

4. Select SQL Server 2000 Components.

5. Select Install Database Server.

6. If the node is using Windows XP Professional, click OK when prompted that only client components will be installed. Refer to Figure 6.

7. Click Next in the Welcome To Microsoft SQL Server Installation Wizard window.

8. Select Local Computer installation option.

9. Select Create a new instance of SQL Server, or Install Clients Tools and click Next.

10. Enter the user name and company name and click Next.

11. Read the license agreement and click Yes to accept.

12. Enter BWQYX-RKXP3-DYC33-DQ7VT-F6FHW when prompted for the SQL server license key number and click Next.

13. Select Client Tools Only and click Next.

14. Accept the default selection of components to be installed in the Select Components window and click Next.

15. Click Next in the Start Copying Files window.

16. Click Finish in the Setup Complete window.

TC04872A

Figure 6. SQL Server Client Components Message

Page 97: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites SQL Server Service Pack 3a Installation

3BSE034678R4101 97

SQL Server Service Pack 3a Installation

To install SQL Server 2000 service pack 3a:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 2 in the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate sql2ksp3.exe in the following directory:

System5 for SQL Server 2000 Standard

-or-

System6 for SQL Server 2000 Personal

3. Double click sql2ksp3.exe to begin the installation.

4. Select (and record) the name of the directory that will contain the temporary setup files.

5. Click Finish.

6. Click OK when prompted that the package has been delivered.

7. Execute setup.bat (located in the directory specified in Step 4).

8. Click Next in the Welcome To The Microsoft SQL Server 2000 service pack 3a Installation Wizard dialog.

9. Click Yes in the Software License Agreement dialog.

10. If installing service pack 3a on a SQL Server server, proceed to the next step. If installing service pack 3a on a SQL Server client, proceed to Step 17.

11. Click Next in the Instance Name dialog.

12. Verify the Windows authentication method option is enabled in the Connect To Server dialog and click Next.

13. Enable the Ignore The Security Threat Warning, Leave The Password Blank option in the SA Password Warning dialog and click OK.

14. Enable the Upgrade Microsoft Search And Apply SQL Server 2000 SP3 (Required) option.

15. Click Continue.

16. Verify the Automatically Send Fatal Error Reports To Microsoft option is disabled in the Error Reporting dialog and click OK.

Page 98: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

MDAC Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

98 3BSE034678R4101

17. Click Next in the Start Copying Files dialog.

18. Click Next in the Shutting Down Tasks dialog (if displayed).

19. Click Finish in the Installing The Software dialog. It may take a few minutes to install the files.

20. If installing service pack 3a on a SQL Server server, click OK when prompted that the master and msdb databases should be backed up because this installation has updated them.

21. If installing service pack 3a on a SQL Server client, enable the restart workstation now option in the Setup Complete dialog.

22. Click Finish.

For hot fixes related to SQL Server 2000 that the 800xA System software has been found to be fully compatible and functional with at the time of system release, refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software.

MDACMicrosoft Data Access Components (MDAC) Version 2.8 SP1 is included and installed with Windows XP Professional SP2. MDAC Version 2.8 SP2 is included and installed with Windows Server 2003. MDAC Version 2.8 is included with 800xA and must be manually installed for Windows 2000 Server.

Install MDAC software on all system nodes running Windows 2000 Server, except the Domain Server node. This software (MDAC_TYP.EXE) is provided in the following directory on 800xA System Installation DVD 1:

System1\Software\Microsoft\

All features included in MDAC are currently part of some versions of Windows. For the MDAC version and hot fixes related to MDAC that the 800xA System software has been found to be fully compatible and functional with at the time of system release, refer to Appendix A, Third Party Software. If, during MDAC installation, a dialog appears indicating that the features are already included, MDAC installation is not required. Click OK to exit the dialog and MDAC installation.

Page 99: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Acrobat Reader

3BSE034678R4101 99

Acrobat ReaderAcrobat Reader (AdbeRdr70_enu_full.exe) is needed to view the online manuals. This software is provided in the following folder 800xA System Installation DVD 1:

System1\Software\Adobe

Remote (Thin) Client for Windows Server 2003This section describes how to install Remote (thin) Client functionality on Windows Server 2003 for the 800xA System. Refer to the information at the following Microsoft web site to install and configure Terminal Server:

http://www.microsoft.com/resources/documentation/WindowsServ/2003/standard/proddocs/en-us/Default.asp?url=/resources/documentation/WindowsServ/2003/standard/proddocs/en-us/terminal_server_role.asp

Remote (Thin) Client for Windows 2000 ServerThis section describes how to install Remote (thin) Client functionality on Windows 2000 Server for the 800xA System. This feature is based on Citrix MetaFrame which must be purchased separately. This section shows how to install and configure Citrix MetaFrame for typical usage of Remote Clients. For details and advanced features regarding the Citrix setup, refer to the Citrix manuals.

Prerequisites

Before setting up the Remote Client Server, the following prerequisites have to be fulfilled:

• All 800xA System server nodes (Aspect, Connectivity, and Application Servers) must be set up as described in this document.

• Remote Client Server - For most scenarios, it is recommended to set up the Remote Client Server on a separate node (i.e. not on an Aspect Server, Connectivity Server node etc.). The Remote Client Server serves the Remote

Page 100: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Internet Information Services (IIS) and Terminal Services Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

100 3BSE034678R4101

Clients using Citrix Metaframe XP. It acts as a Workplace client node for the 800xA System and has to be installed accordingly.

• Remote Clients - The Remote Clients require either Internet Explorer or a standalone Citrix client application to connect to the Remote Client Server. When using Internet Explorer, during the first connection to the Remote Client Server the required Citrix Software is downloaded automatically (refer to Remote Client Configuration on page 104). Windows CE based Remote Client Computers may also be used.

• Domain - The 800xA System servers and the Remote Client Server have to be members of the same domain. The necessary users and groups have to be created in this domain, as described in Users and Groups on page 78.

• Network - The Remote Client Server has to be connected with the Aspect Servers via the 800xA System network. Remote Clients are connected to the Remote Client Server via Internet or local network.

Internet Information Services (IIS) and Terminal Services

Before installing Citrix, the 800xA workplace or any other application on the Remote Client Server, components for Internet Information Services (IIS) and Terminal Services have to be installed.

Internet Information Services Installation

1. Select:

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components

This displays the Windows Component Wizard.

2. Check Internet Information Services (IIS).

3. Click Details. This displays a list of IIS components.

4. Assure that the following components are selected by clicking in the corresponding boxes: Common files, Documentation, FrontPage 2000 Server

On the Remote Client Server, the 800xA Workplace, Microsoft Office or other applications have to be installed AFTER installing Terminal Services.

Page 101: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Citrix Metaframe XP

3BSE034678R4101 101

Extensions, Internet Information Services Snap-In, Internet Services Manager (HTML), SMTP Service, World Wide Web Server.

5. Click OK.

6. Click Next.

7. Click Finish to complete setup of Internet Information Services.

Terminal Services Installation

1. Select:

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components

This displays the Windows Component Wizard.

2. Select the Terminal Services check box.

3. Click Next.

4. Insert the Microsoft CD if prompted.

5. Click Finish.

6. Reboot, if prompted by the system.

Citrix Metaframe XP

Refer to Citrix manuals to install Citrix Metaframe XP on the Remote Client Server.

Citrix Licensing

Refer to Citrix manuals to license Citrix Metaframe XP.

800xA System Workplace and other Applications

Before installing the 800xA System workplace or other applications, the Terminal Server must be put in install mode. If this has not been done an error message appears.

1. Select:

Start > Run...

to open the command line tool.

Page 102: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Citrix Configuration: Publishing Applications Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

102 3BSE034678R4101

2. In the Run dialog enter:

change user/install

and click OK.

3. Install the system Workplace Client as explained in Section 6, Process Portal and Basic System Functions.

4. If needed, install other applications.

5. After installation, to change Terminal Services back into execute mode:

a. Select:

Start > Run...

b. In the Run dialog enter:

change user /execute

and click OK.

Citrix Configuration: Publishing Applications

800xA System applications accessed from the Remote Clients must be added and configured with the Citrix Management console. This section provides guidelines for using this console for 800xA System applications. Detailed instructions regarding the Management Console are provided in its manual. It is recommended to read that manual before configuring applications.

To roll out the system workplace for Remote Client access:

1. Open the Citrix Management Console and select the Farm's Applications.

2. Add a new application to be published. Enter a display name (e.g. PPA40) and an application description. This information is visible for the users later on.

3. Click Next.

4. Specify what to publish. You may publish an application, the whole desktop or content, i.e. a UNC or URL path (e.g. for publishing web pages or file repositories). To publish PPA, select Application.

Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 after rebooting, in order to set Terminal Services back into install mode.

Page 103: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Citrix Configuration: Publishing Applications

3BSE034678R4101 103

5. Select the desired application by clicking Browse. Select the server and click through the file system structure to the installation directory of the PPA platform:

Install Drive\Program files\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\Process Portal A\bin

6. Select AfwWorkplaceApplication.exe and click OK.

7. Working directory will change automatically. Click Next.

8. Program Neighborhood Settings: No entries needed. Click Next.

9. Specify Application Appearance:

a. Select session window size to the desired resolution.

b. Select true color (24 bit). Keep the other check boxes at their default setting.

c. Click Next.

10. Specify ICA Client Requirements.

a. Select Enable Audio. Optionally, this can be set as a minimum requirement for the remote clients.

b. Select Encryption 128Bit (RC5). This can be set as a minimum requirement.

c. Click Next.

11. Specify application limits: No changes. Click Next.

12. Specify Servers. Specify the server where this application is installed: select the name of the Remote Client Server, click Add, and click Next.

13. Specify Users. Add users or user groups that are allowed to use the application:

a. Select the domain and enter your credentials if needed.

b. Select Users.

c. Select the group IndustrialITUser and click Add. It is not required to add further groups or users, as special user groups are handled by the system's local user structure and by the domain Active Directory. (It is not

Page 104: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Remote Client Configuration Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

104 3BSE034678R4101

recommended to allow Anonymous or not-PPA-configured accounts access to the application.)

d. Click Next.

14. Specify File Type Associations. No changes needed, as PPA is not associated with any file type. Click Finish. The PPA icon will appear under Applications in the Citrix Farm. This means it is now published and visible to the users.

Remote Client Configuration

For Remote Client nodes no special configuration is needed. The required software is Internet Explorer, or, alternatively, any other Citrix Client. Also, Windows CE based Remote Client Computers can be used. When using Internet Explorer, during the first connection to the Remote Server the required Citrix Software will be downloaded and installed automatically (as ActiveX control).

For better performance it is recommended to use the ICA client.

Using Internet Explorer

For the first connection to the Remote Client Server the following steps have to be performed:

1. Open Internet Explorer by clicking the Internet Explorer Icon on the Desktop.

2. Connect to the Remote Client Server by entering in the address bar: http:// followed by the name or IP address of the Remote Client Server.

3. Log in by entering the user credentials.

4. Install the ActiveX Control if necessary. A note in the lower right, next to the Citrix logo, might appear that indicates that the ICA or Citrix Web Client must be installed. If a client installation was necessary, it is not explicitly necessary to restart the browser. If any errors occur, restart the client computer.

5. Select PPA40 (or the name chosen when publishing the PPA application) in the list of the published applications. If client-side sound is enabled, the windows logon sound (if available by server default) should be heard and the Workplace application should show a selection of existing workplaces. (If the ActiveX

Page 105: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 3 Installing Prerequisites Backup Software

3BSE034678R4101 105

Control (refer to Step 4) has not been installed, starting the PPA application will result in an undesired software download for launch.asp).

6. Select an application, for example the Plant Explorer Workplace, and open it.

7. To terminate the Remote Client session, either close the Internet Explorer Window or log off via the start menu of the Remote Desktop.

Using the ICA Client

Perform the following steps in order to use an ICA Client instead of Internet Explorer:

1. Run ica32.exe from the Clients installation kit or download it from the Citrix web pages to install the Citrix Program Neighborhood Application.

2. Double-click PPA40 (or the name chosen when publishing the PPA application) to start the Workplace application.

3. Enter the proper credentials when necessary.

4. Select an application, for example the Plant Explorer Workplace, and open it.

5. To terminate the Remote Client session, close all windows that have been opened by the PPA application.

Backup SoftwareIt is recommended to use a disk imaging software package to make full disk backups. This allows the contents of a disk to be restored to the state it had at the recent backup. This will save a significant amount of time in the event of a disk crash.

To install, follow the installation procedure that comes with the product. If planning on creating disk images on this computer, a FAT32 partition may be required if using certain disk imaging utilities; however, most disk imaging software now supports FAT32 or NTFS.

It might be necessary to change some settings when the Citrix server cannot be found by the client application. This means that it is required to add the IP address of the server in the list at the end of the Connection Dialog tab of the File > Application Set Settings menu item.

Page 106: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Virus Scan Software Section 3 Installing Prerequisites

106 3BSE034678R4101

Virus Scan Software

Do not allow unauthorized software to run on the clients or servers used for process control, or on other nodes connected to any part of the network without a firewall in between. Use an updated virus scanner to regularly scan the systems for virus.

Have an updated virus scanner/shield running in all nodes and have it set up to scan all incoming e-mail. Run all external traffic through the firewall, and set up a virus scanner for all traffic through the firewall.

Allow only authorized users to log on to the systems. Do not allow guests. Do not allow normal users, for example process control operators, to normally run the system with administrator privileges.

It is very important to protect the 800xA System from viruses, trojans and other malicious software. The use of Virus protection and detection must be based on a corporate security policy that must be revised on a regular basis. This is the responsibility of the user of the IndustrialIT system.

Page 107: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 107

Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS)

Introduction

Set up a License Server node by installing the CLS Server and CLS Client on the Primary Aspect Server. Install the CLS Client on all other 800xA System nodes, except the Domain Server node.

Certain 800xA System functions must be licensed before use. These functions will not operate until the applicable licenses are installed. The software is licensed by relating a software key for each software feature with a unique machine identifier. Software keys are obtained from the ABB Software License Administration System. This section describes how to install the licensing software and then use the License Entry program to apply for software keys. The software keys must be installed on the designated License Server when they are received them from ABB. Section 25, Licensing 800xA System Software explains how to install and manage the software keys.

An overview of the software licensing procedure is shown in Figure 7, and described in Licensing Overview on page 108.

The Central Licensing System (CLS) also requires the installation of the Central Licensing System extension. Refer to CLS System Extension on page 115.

Figure 7. Software Licensing Procedure

Page 108: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Licensing Overview Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS)

108 3BSE034678R4101

Licensing OverviewThe 800xA System uses a licensing mechanism called the Central Licensing System (CLS). One designated node, typically an Aspect/Connectivity Server node, should contain the License Server (CLS Server). This server dynamically distributes the available licenses as they are needed to all other nodes within the system. As an alternative, licenses may also be reserved for use by a particular node.

Software keys are generated by ABB, and are uniquely associated with the machine identifier (ID) of the License Server node. The machine ID may be an Ethernet address or a hardware dongle ID. For the software to run, the machine ID used to generate the software key must be present on the License Server node. The License Server software periodically checks that the machine ID is still present. A single machine ID supports multiple software keys for different features and for different applications.

The machine ID is sent to ABB when a license key request is made. After receiving the software keys, they can be entered in the License Entry program for proper software operation.

To license 800xA System software:

• Install the License Server software on the designated License Server (refer to Installation on page 109).

• Obtain the machine ID. This is required to obtain unique software keys from ABB (refer to Obtaining the Machine ID on page 110).

• Fill out and submit the Software Key Request Form (refer to Requesting Software Keys on page 113).

• Install the License Client software on all other 800xA System Server and Client nodes (refer to License Client on page 114).

• The CLS System Extension must be installed before it can be loaded into the 800xA System as a system extension. Install the CLS Extension on every node in the system (refer to CLS System Extension on page 115).

• After receiving software keys from ABB, run the License Entry program from the License Server node to install the licenses from the license file. This is described in Software Key Installation on page 263.

Page 109: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS) License Server Setup

3BSE034678R4101 109

License Server SetupThis section covers the following topics:

• Installation.• Obtaining the Machine ID.• Requesting Software Keys.

Installation

Set up a License Server by installing the CLS Server and CLS Client components on the Primary Aspect Server.

To install the required licensing components on the designated License Server:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

System1\Licensing\CLS

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Select Components dialog: Select the CLS Server and CLS Client check boxes.

b. ABB Central License Service Username and Password dialog: Enter the username and password for the 800xA Service User (refer to Users and Groups on page 78). Use the domain\user syntax to specify a domain account.

c. InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog: Deselect the Start LCC Service check box.

When installing this software on an Aspect/Connectivity Server, use the 800xA Installing User account configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

Page 110: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Obtaining the Machine ID Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS)

110 3BSE034678R4101

5. Enable Rainbow® SentinelSuperPro™ Dongle Support if necessary.

a. To launch the License Entry program, select:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Entry

b. Select:

Machine IDs > Install SPro driver

c. Follow the prompts to install the drivers.

d. Click OK when the License Entry program indicates that the drivers have been installed.

e. Close the License Entry program.

6. Use Add/Remove Programs via Windows Control Panel to verify the ABB Central Licensing System has been installed.

Obtaining the Machine ID

There are two types of machine IDs that the ABB licensing program supports: a removable hardware key, called a dongle, or the fixed Ethernet address of a network adapter. Each of the machine ID types has advantages and disadvantages. Using the Ethernet address as a machine ID is generally more convenient. However, if the network adapter is ever replaced or permanently removed from the node, a new set of software keys will be required.

The Rainbow SentinelSuperPro hardware key, or dongle, is a copy protection device that comes in two formats - the parallel port version attaches to the 25-pin parallel port of the node, and the USB version attaches to a USB port of the node. Some advantages of a dongle are:

• The dongle can be moved to another node without needing to get new software keys. However, dongles can only be attached to a single node at any given time.

• Other machine IDs may need to be replaced to upgrade the software. New software keys must then be requested. However, there is no need to replace the dongle with another one.

• The parallel port version of the Rainbow SentinelSuperPro dongle allows sharing of the parallel port with most other parallel port devices.

This step is required if using a Rainbow SentinelSuperPro hardware key (either the parallel port or USB port version) to control licensing.

Page 111: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS) Obtaining the Machine ID

3BSE034678R4101 111

To use a dongle as the machine ID, order it from ABB. When the dongle is received, record the dongle number on the ABB licensing registration form and install the dongle.

In most cases, ABB software licensing functions support multiple dongles that are daisy chained together. The dongle for the 800xA System can be anywhere in the daisy chain. USB dongles cannot be daisy chained, but they can be plugged into multiple USB ports.

If the licensing software is installed on the License Server, use the License Entry program to obtain the machine ID.

To use the License Entry program to obtain the machine ID:

1. To launch the License Entry program, select:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Entry

2. Select:

Machine IDs > Available IDs...

from the menu to display the Machine IDs list as shown in Figure 8.

To obtain the machine ID without installing the License Server (software not available), use the method described in Obtaining the Ethernet Address on page 112 (applicable if using the Ethernet address) or Reading the Machine ID from a Dongle on page 113 (applicable if using a dongle).

TC05703A

Figure 8. Available Machine IDs

Page 112: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Obtaining the Machine ID Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS)

112 3BSE034678R4101

3. Record the machine ID and use it in the procedure for Requesting Software Keys on page 113.

Obtaining the Ethernet Address

If the Ethernet address will be used as the machine ID and the License Server has not been installed, use this procedure.

1. Launch a Windows Command Prompt window.

2. Enter: ipconfig/all.

3. Read the line for Physical Address under the information for the network adapter that will be similar to the one shown in Figure 9. If the node has two network adapters, two addresses will be shown.

This method is only applicable if using the Ethernet address as the machine ID.

Do not use the Ethernet address as the machine ID if there is a chance that one of the network adapters will be removed or replaced. The permanent license is tied to the submitted machine ID. If the network adapter is removed or replaced, the license will be invalidated.

TC05704A

Figure 9. Using ipconfig/all to Find Machine ID

Page 113: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS) Requesting Software Keys

3BSE034678R4101 113

4. Record the machine ID (without the hyphens) on the Software Key Request Form.

5. Follow the instructions in Requesting Software Keys on page 113.

Reading the Machine ID from a Dongle

Each parallel port or USB dongle is labeled with its unique machine ID. The label looks like Figure 10, where the machine ID is as indicated.

Requesting Software Keys

To request software keys (unless told otherwise by an ABB representative):

1. Obtain the machine ID of the node that the CLS Server software is installed on, or going to be installed on (refer to Obtaining the Machine ID on page 110).

2. Locate and have available the registration license numbers found on the license certificate form shipped with the software.

3. Complete the Software Key Request Form shipped with the software. Follow the instructions found on this form.

4. Fill in the Software Key Request Form as necessary.

This method is only applicable if using a dongle as the machine ID.

Figure 10. Dongle Machine ID

Be sure to enter a valid e-mail address on the Software Key Request Form.

As an alternative, generate and complete a new Software Key Request Form using the License Entry program by selecting:

License > Request SWKey

from the menu.

Page 114: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

License Client Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS)

114 3BSE034678R4101

5. Send the Software Key Request Form to the ABB Software License Administration System using one of the methods described on the registration form.

6. Wait for the software keys to be returned. The method by which the software keys will be returned is selected on the Software Key Request Form. The choices are:

– Internet mail.– Postal mail.– Fax.

Internet mail is recommended so the software keys will be returned as an attached license (.sla) file. This is the format required by the License Entry program. Detach the file from the Internet mail and save it to a location on the License Server where it may be accessed by the License Entry program.

When the software keys are received, install them on the License Server as described in Section 25, Licensing 800xA System Software.

License ClientPerform this procedure on every 800xA System node that will be a client to the License Server.

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

System1\Licensing\CLS

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Select Components dialog: Select the CLS Client check box.

b. Select CLS Server Location dialog: Enter the name of the node running the License Server (CLS Server).

-or-

Click Browse... to browse for the node.

Page 115: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS) CLS System Extension

3BSE034678R4101 115

c. ABB Central License Service Username and Password dialog: Enter the username and password for the 800xA Service User (refer to Users and Groups on page 78). Use the domain\user syntax to specify a domain account.

d. InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog: Deselect the Start LCC Service check box.

5. Use Add/Remove Programs via Windows Control Panel to verify the ABB Central Licensing System has been installed.

CLS System ExtensionThe Central Licensing System (CLS) System Extension must be installed before it can be loaded into the 800xA System as a system extension.

Install the Central Licensing System Extension on every node in the system. However, it is only necessary to load the system extension on the Primary Aspect Server (refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup).

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

System1\Licensing\CLS System Extension

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Installation Type dialog: Select Typical or Complete.

If prompted to create this user, click Yes. This prompt is only displayed if the 800xA Service User account does not already exist in the current node.

Page 116: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

CLS System Extension Section 4 Central Licensing System (CLS)

116 3BSE034678R4101

Page 117: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 117

Section 5 RNRP

IntroductionThis section describes how to install Redundant Network Routing Protocol (RNRP) on the Domain Controller (or any other node that requires RNRP independent of the 800xA basic system software). This software is provided on the 800xA System Installation DVD.

Install RNRP as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

InstallationTo install this software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

System2\RNRP

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the RNRP check box.

b. Installation Type dialog: Accept the default selection (Typical).

Page 118: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Verification Section 5 RNRP

118 3BSE034678R4101

VerificationTo verify that RNRP is installed:

• Check that there is an RNRP icon in the system tray (Figure 11). Click it and verify that the RNRP monitor is started.

• Right-click the RNRP icon to verify that the RNRP Wizard is started.

Figure 11. RNRP Icon

Page 119: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 119

Section 6 Process Portal and Basic SystemFunctions

IntroductionThis section describes how to install the Process Portal software and basic system functions. This installation includes RNRP. This software is provided on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 and must be installed on all 800xA System nodes.

This section also describes how to install the following other basic system functions:

• Excel Data Access (DataDirect).• Application Scheduler.• Calculations.• Softpoint Server.

These components are provided on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 and may be installed when this functionality is required.

Before installing the system software, the applicable Windows operating system and other software prerequisites must already be installed according to Section 3, Installing Prerequisites.

Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

The installation of Process Portal must be done in two steps. Version 4.0 must be installed followed by Version 4.1.

Verify the domain is functioning properly before installing any 800xA System software. Do not change IP addresses on Domain Controllers, Aspect Servers, or Connectivity Servers in a system.

There may be some minor waiting periods while Process Portal is installing.

Page 120: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Process Portal Section 6 Process Portal and Basic System Functions

120 3BSE034678R4101

Process PortalThis procedure installs Process Portal, RNRP, and other basic system functionality. This is required by all 800xA System nodes (all servers and clients). This includes the trend function, Graphics Builder, Instrumentation ActiveX Library, and Symbol Factory.

To install this software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

System2\Process Portal A 4.0.0.1

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the ABB Process Portal A check box.

b. Installation Selection dialog (Figure 12): Select the components to install. All components are selected by default This is the recommended configuration.

Figure 12. Installation Selection Dialog

Page 121: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 6 Process Portal and Basic System Functions Process Portal

3BSE034678R4101 121

c. System Software User Settings dialog (Figure 13): Specify groups and users. Refer to Table 31 for guidelines.

Figure 13. System Software User Settings Dialog

Table 31. System Software User Settings

Setting Description

System Admin & System User group names

Retain the default User Group names for these parameters (IndustrialITAdmin and IndustrialITUser respectively).

For multiple node configurations, the domain name must be entered (use the NetBIOS name of the domain; for example, PTTDOMAIN and not the fully qualified domain name pttdomain.abb.com). Leave these fields blank for single node configurations, for example when setting up an Information Management consolidation node.

Service Account Enter the 800xA Service user name as configured in Users and Groups on page 78. The syntax is domainName\username

Page 122: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Basic System Functions Section 6 Process Portal and Basic System Functions

122 3BSE034678R4101

5. To verify this software is installed:

Check to see if the Configuration Wizard is available in the Start menu:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Configuration Wizard

6. Repeat the procedure to install Version 4.1, except in Step 2 use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

System2\Process Portal A 4.0.0.1 SP1

Basic System FunctionsThe following basic system functions are provided on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 and may be installed when this functionality is required:

• Excel Data Access (DataDirect).• Application Scheduler.• Calculations.• SoftPoint Server (refer to SoftPoint Server on page 123).

Password Enter the password for the service account. This ensures that the services are running on a secured account.

Autostart System on Windows Startup

Checking this option causes the System Workplace software to start up when Windows is started. This is recommended.

Apply same settings to application logging

Checking this option causes the AppLog function to be configured at the same time as the system software user settings, and the same settings.

The configuration of AppLog can be done manually in the Configuration Wizard after creation of system if necessary.

When installing the Process Portal software for an Information Management Application Server, it is acceptable to defer installing these basic system functions, except for the SoftPoint Server, and install them with the IM Server software. All of these components, except SoftPoint Server, are also installed with the IM Server software.

Table 31. System Software User Settings

Setting Description

Page 123: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 6 Process Portal and Basic System Functions SoftPoint Server

3BSE034678R4101 123

Excel Data Access, Application Scheduler, and Calculations are installed by running .msi files.

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive (if it is not still there from Process Portal A installation).

2. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the following directory:

System1\Core Components

3. Double-click the applicable .msi file to launch the InstallShield Wizard:

– ABB Inform IT - Application Scheduler.– ABB Inform IT - Calculations.– ABB Inform IT - DataDirect.

4. Click Install, then follow the wizard to complete the installation.

5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 for the other basic system functions as required.

SoftPoint ServerInstall the SoftPoint server on the Aspect Servers, on all nodes where the SoftPoint Server services will be executed, and on all 800xA Client nodes where it is desired to view the Aspect Systems implemented by the SoftPoint Server.

To install the SoftPoint Server:

1. Use Windows Explorer to locate SoftPoint Server.msi in the following directory:

System1\Core Components

2. Double-click SoftPoint Server.msi to begin the installation.

3. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Setup Type dialog: Select Complete.

Page 124: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

SoftPoint Server Section 6 Process Portal and Basic System Functions

124 3BSE034678R4101

Page 125: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 125

Section 7 800xA Instructions

IntroductionInstall 800xA System and Functional Area instructions on all 800xA System nodes, except the Domain Server node.

InstallationTo install 800xA System and Functional Area instructions:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Documentation

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the 800xA Instructions check box.

b. Installation Type dialog: Leave Typical selected and click Next.

The 800xA System and Functional Area Release Notes and Instructions are included on the Release Notes, Documentation CD for access before installing the 800xA System software. The Documentation folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 (or the Documentation CD if CDs are ordered) includes the installation kit for installing the 800xA System and Functional Area instructions.

Page 126: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 7 800xA Instructions

126 3BSE034678R4101

Page 127: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 127

Section 8 Diagnostics Collection Tool

IntroductionThis section contains installation procedures for the Diagnostics Collection Tool software.

Supported ProductsThis release of the Diagnostics Collection Tool for the 800xA System supports:

• Process Portal A Version 4.1.• OPC® Server for AC 800M.• Control Builder M.• 800xA for Harmony.• Manufacturing Management.• IIT Version Checker.• PC, Network and Software Monitoring.• PLC Connect.• SoftPoint Server.• Central Licensing System.

Supported Operating Systems:

• Windows 2000 Server.• Windows Server 2003.• Windows XP Professional.

InstallationInstall the Diagnostics Collection Tool on each node on the 800xA System from which it is desired to gather diagnostic data.

Page 128: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 8 Diagnostics Collection Tool

128 3BSE034678R4101

To use one node to remotely retrieve diagnostics from other nodes:

• Use the same 800xA Service User Username and Password during setup on all nodes.

• Process Portal A must be installed on the Diagnostics Collection Tool Client in order to retrieve Process Portal A diagnostics data from a remote node.

To install the software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Setup.exe in the following directory:

System1\Diagnostics Collection Tool

3. Double-click Setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation.

Page 129: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 129

Section 9 SMS and e-mail Messaging

Introduction

SMS and e-mail Messaging is a system extension to the 800xA System. It provides a method for sending messages based on alarm and event information to user devices such as mobile telephones, e-mail accounts, and pagers.

Install this software on all nodes in the system, except the Domain Server node. Install it as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

Installation1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

AssetOpt\SMS and e-mail Messaging

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation.

The current version of SMS and e-mail Messaging is Version 4.0 (SMS and e-mail Messaging 4.0.0.418). If this installation is part of an upgrade and SMS and e-mail Messaging Version 4.0 is currently installed on the system, do not proceed with further installation.

Page 130: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 9 SMS and e-mail Messaging

130 3BSE034678R4101

Page 131: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 131

Section 10 AC 800M

IntroductionThis section describes how to install AC 800M software. It covers:

• AC 800M Connect. This is required on the Aspect Server, Application Servers, and Workplace Clients in a system using AC 800M controllers. Refer to AC 800M Connect on page 131.

To be able to install Control Builder M, AC 800M Connect must first be installed on the Engineering Workplace.

• Control Builder M. This is installed on all nodes where requiring engineering functionality. Refer to Control Builder M on page 132.

• The OPC server for AC 800M. This is required on AC 800M Connectivity Servers. Refer to OPC Server for AC 800M on page 134.

• SoftController. Enables simulating an application without a real controller. SoftController can also be used as a controller, though SoftController does not allow I/O connections. Refer to Base Software for SoftControl on page 136.

AC 800M ConnectAC 800M Connect provides the connection/integration between AC 800M and the 800xA System workplaces. Install AC 800M Connect on all system nodes (install the client on the Aspect Server, Application Servers, and Workplace Clients in a system using AC 800M controllers). To install AC 800M Connect:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

Install all AC 800M software as the 800xA Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

Page 132: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Control Builder M Section 10 AC 800M

132 3BSE034678R4101

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Startme.bat in the following directory:

System3

3. Double-click Startme.bat to begin the installation. The Welcome display will appear.

4. Click Install software. This displays a dialog showing the products that can be installed for AC 800M.

5. Select (DO NOT double-click) AC 800M Connect. Read the text in each dialog for important information concerning steps to be taken during installation. For normal use, the suggested default settings are recommended. Refer to the following guidelines when the Setup Type dialog appears to determine whether or not to install the Time Adapter.

The Time Adapter is required if NOT using the 800xA for Advant Master (AC 400) Time Adapter. Choose Typical to install the Time Adapter, or Custom to deselect the Time Adapter (when using the 800xA for Advant Master (AC 400) Time Adapter). The installation then proceeds automatically until completed.

6. Close the installation dialog to return to the Welcome dialog.

7. Click Exit to exit out of this installation. Read the Release Notes (delivered on a separate CD included with the installation media).

8. To verify, go to Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel and check if AC 800M Connect 4.1 appears in the list.

Control Builder MThis section describes how to install Control Builder M Professional - the tool for configuring AC 800M controllers and I/O, and control applications for the controllers. Install this software on all nodes requiring this functionality. The installation of Control Builder M will also install the MMS Server for AC 800M, needed for data exchange with controllers.

To install Control Builder M, continue to Control Builder M. To install OPC Server for AC 800M, proceed to OPC Server for AC 800M on page 134. If SoftController is desired, proceed to Base Software for SoftControl on page 136.

Page 133: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 10 AC 800M Control Builder M Software

3BSE034678R4101 133

Control Builder M Software

To install the Control Builder M software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Startme.bat in the following directory:

System3

3. Double-click Startme.bat to begin the installation. The Welcome display will appear.

4. Click Install Software. This displays a dialog showing the products that can be installed for AC 800M.

5. Select Control Builder M Professional. Read the text in each dialog for important information concerning steps to be taken during installation. For normal use, the suggested default settings are recommended.

A dialog shows that the installation has been successfully completed with the specified settings. The installation is now complete.

6. Close the Install Software dialog to return to the Welcome dialog.

7. Click Exit to exit out of this installation. Read the Release Notes (delivered on a separate CD included with the installation media).

8. To verify the installation, check that the installation is OK by starting the Control Builder M client, and looking at the Help information. Check that there is an ABB MMS Server for AC 800M icon in the task bar area.

Firmware

To install the Controller Firmware into the installed Control Builder:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Startme.bat in the following directory:

System4

3. Double-click Startme.bat to begin the installation. The Welcome display will appear.

This check cannot be performed until after the node has been added to the system.

Page 134: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

OPC Server for AC 800M Section 10 AC 800M

134 3BSE034678R4101

4. Click Install Firmware. Read the text in each dialog for important information concerning steps to be taken during installation. For normal use, the suggested default settings are recommended. Install destinations can not be changed because the install path is preselected when Control Builder M is installed.

A dialog shows that the installation has been successfully completed with the specified settings. The installation is now complete.

5. Close the Install Firmware dialog to return to the Welcome dialog.

6. Click Exit to exit out of this installation. Read the Release Notes (delivered on a separate CD included with the installation media).

OPC Server for AC 800MThis section describes how to install the OPC Server for AC 800M. OPC Server for AC 800M enables access to data and events in the controllers. Install this software on all AC 800M Connectivity Servers. The Connectivity Server may be single or in parallel operation, and the OPC Server for AC 800M will then also be single or parallel.

The OPC Server for AC 800M software can also be installed standalone on a node (as long as PPA is installed), if special access to controller data is required (e.g. by some non-Industrial IT software (which has its own OPC Client)).

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Startme.bat in the following directory:

System3

3. Double-click Startme.bat to begin the installation. The Welcome display will appear.

4. Click Install software. This displays a dialog showing the products that can be installed for AC 800M.

If OPC Server for AC 800M is required, proceed to OPC Server for AC 800M. If SoftController is desired, proceed to Base Software for SoftControl on page 136.

Page 135: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 10 AC 800M OPC Server for AC 800M

3BSE034678R4101 135

5. Select OPC Server for AC 800M. Read the text in each dialog for important information concerning steps to be taken during installation. For normal use, the suggested default settings are recommended.

A dialog shows that the installation has been successfully completed with the specified settings.

Following this the Setup Wizard is automatically started with the Service Account options preselected.

6. Use the dialog shown in Figure 14 to specify that the OPC server use the Domain\800xA Service account (as specified in System software user settings dialog when Process Portal A was installed). Click Apply and then Close when finished.

The installation is now complete.

7. Close the Install Software dialog to return to the Welcome dialog.

8. Click Exit to exit out of this installation. Read the Release Notes (delivered on a separate CD included with the installation media).

Figure 14. Service Account Setup

Page 136: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Base Software for SoftControl Section 10 AC 800M

136 3BSE034678R4101

Base Software for SoftControlSoftController enables simulating an application without a real controller. SoftController can also be used as a controller, though SoftController does not allow I/O connections.

To install the Base Software for SoftControl:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Startme.bat in the following directory:

System3

Double-click Startme.bat to begin the installation. The Welcome dialog appears.

3. Click Install software. This displays a dialog showing the products that can be installed for AC 800M.

4. Select Base Software for SoftControl. Read the text in each dialog for important information concerning steps to be taken during installation. For normal use, the suggested default settings are recommended.

5. A dialog shows that the installation has been successfully completed with the specified settings.

6. The installation is now complete.

7. Click Exit to exit out of this installation. Read the Release Notes (delivered on a separate CD included with the installation media).

SoftController requires a separate software license.

Page 137: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 137

Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus DeviceIntegration

IntroductionFOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration integrates the FOUNDATION Fieldbus architecture and field devices into Industrial IT 800xA System environment. It consists of these components:

• Fieldbus Builder FF integrates the FOUNDATION Fieldbus architecture and field devices into the Industrial IT 800xA System environment.

• OPC Server FF makes data from FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices available to any desired OPC Client.

• FF Device Integration Library is a predefined field device library that provides easy integration of FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices into the Industrial IT 800xA System environment.

Fieldbus Builder FF is the Engineering tool for FOUNDATION Fieldbus applications. It is used to define the hardware structure and functionality of different manufacturers’ H1 and HSE devices and load these into the devices. In a Fieldbus Builder FF project an HSE subnet can be accurately configured. Fieldbus Builder FF can administer any number of projects.

Fieldbus Builder FF also enables a standalone FF network that is not linked to an IEC 61131 controller to be configured and commissioned.

OPC Server FF makes data from FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices available to any OPC Clients. It also creates the connection between the Client/Server Network and the field level (HSE subnet) for Fieldbus Builder FF (Connectivity Server FF). To separate the Control Network from the FF HSE subnet every OPC Server FF has two network adapters as standard, one for the connection with the Client/Server Network and one for the connection with the HSE subnet.

Page 138: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration

138 3BSE034678R4101

Each node type has different FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration software requirements. Install this software on all 800xA System nodes as described in Table 13 on page 45 in Section 1, Installation Planning.

Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

Installation Install the software first on an Aspect Server or Connectivity Server and afterwards on the other nodes.

Close all programs before you start the installation.

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

DevMgmt3

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation.

a. In the Welcome dialog the check boxes for all components are selected by default. Deselect the components that are not necessary.

Install Fieldbus Builder FF and FF Device Integration Library on all Aspect Server nodes, FF Connectivity Server nodes, Workplace Client nodes, and Engineering Workplace nodes.

Install OPC Server FF on all FF Connectivity Server nodes.

5. The installation procedure differs slightly depending on the selected components:

a. If Fieldbus Builder FF and/or the FF Device Integration Library is selected the welcome dialog appears again with a green check when the installation is finished. Click Exit to complete the installation.

b. If OPC Server FF is selected in the welcome dialog some additional settings are necessary.

During the installation a dialog for entering hardware and software settings is displayed after unpacking the OPC Server FF software. In the

Page 139: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration General Settings

3BSE034678R4101 139

left-hand side, select the components to be configured and enter the settings in the fields on the right per the remaining instructions.

When all the settings have been specified, continue the installation with Registration Overview on page 143.

General Settings

When General Settings is selected, the Network Settings dialog for network settings is displayed, as shown in Figure 15. Refer to Table 32 on page 140 for details.

Default Language

For future use. Fieldbus Builder FF will be started in the language specified in the Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel. If Fieldbus Builder FF is not installed in that language, Fieldbus Builder FF will be started in the language specified as Default Language. The current version only supports English.

Fieldbus Builder FF Settings

Selecting Fieldbus Builder FF displays the Fieldbus Builder FF settings dialog.

The only setting in this dialog is the Resource ID. A number of software components can run simultaneously on one node. Each component (e.g. OPC Server

These settings can also be made or altered after installation is finished by selecting:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > Device Mgmt > FF > Configure

Contact the network supervisor before entering or changing IP settings.

To determine the network address of a computer:Start > Control Panel > Network Connections > Click the right mouse button to select a network connection >Properties > Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) > Properties

Redundant Network Routing Protocol (RNRP) is used for redundancy. Therefore, do not add an IP Address for a redundant computer.

Page 140: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Fieldbus Builder FF Settings Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration

140 3BSE034678R4101

Figure 15. Network Settings Dialog

Table 32. Network Address Settings

Dialog element Description

Network interface The default settings and ability to change the check boxes for the network adapters depends on the components installed on this node.

Only those network adapters that are checked here, may be configured in this step.

Client/Server Network: Selected by default. Deselect it if configuring a single node system.

HSE Subnet: Selected by default. Do not change default within an 800xA System.

Page 141: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration Page Layout

3BSE034678R4101 141

FF, Fieldbus Builder FF) must be given a unique resource identification number so that it can be uniquely addressed. Fieldbus Builder FF has the fixed resource ID 21. This setting can not be changed.

Page Layout

This dialog is used to specify the page margins for the installed printer.

FF Standard Dictionary

For future use. This setting determines the language of the FF Standard Dictionary used in Fieldbus Builder FF. The current version only supports English.

Client/Server Network interface

IP Address: Local IP address of this node in the Client/Server Network, i.e. the IP address of the network adapter through which the Client/Server Network is accessed.

Client/Server Network interface

Subnet Mask: A node on a TCP/IP network is identified by its 32-bit IP address. The IP address consists of NetID and HostID. The subnet mask specifies the boundary between NetID and HostID.

HSE subnet interface IP Address: Local IP address of the node in the HSE network, i.e. the address of the network adapter through which the HSE subnet is accessed. Only important if configuring a Connectivity Server FF node.

Table 32. Network Address Settings (Continued)

Dialog element Description

Page 142: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

OPC Server FF Settings Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration

142 3BSE034678R4101

OPC Server FF Settings

When OPC Server FF is selected, the dialog shown in Figure 16 is displayed. Refer to Table 33 on page 142 for details.

The settings under OPC Server FF / Resource IDs are only required on those nodes that are going to act as a Connectivity Server FF.

Since an OPC Server FF node only runs one HSE Subnet, it is not advisable to create more than one OPC Server FF instance on a node by adding more than one resource ID.

Figure 16. OPC Server Resource IDs

Table 33. OPC Server Resource IDs

Dialog element Description

Resource IDs A number of OPC Server FF instances and other software components (e.g. Fieldbus Builder FF) can run simultaneously in one node. Each component must be given a unique resource identification number so that it can be uniquely addressed.

The resource ID for the OPC Server FF can range from 1 to 255, but Fieldbus Builder FF has the fixed resource ID 21 as described in Fieldbus Builder FF Settings on page 139.

An OPC Server FF will only be available on this node if a resource ID is created.

Page 143: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration Registration Overview

3BSE034678R4101 143

To configure the user account for the OPC Server FF:

1. Select Resource ID in the list and click Configure. This produces the User Account OPC Server FF dialog.

2. Enter the 800xA Service User user name in the User: field.

3. Enter the 800xA Service User password in the Password: field and the Repeat Password: field.

4. Click OK to exit the configuration program.

Registration Overview

Installed software components are automatically registered in Windows. The FBB FF Connect Registration tab shows the installed software components.

1. Click OK to close the dialog for hardware and software settings. The welcome dialog appears again with a green check when the installation is finished. Click Exit to end the installation.

Remove Use Remove to delete the instance of the OPC Server FF and its corresponding resource ID from the node.

Add Use Add to create additional OPC Server FF instances (OPC Server FF resource id) on those nodes that are going to act as Connectivity Server FF.

Configure Use Configure to configure the user account for the OPC Server FF

If the dialog is closed without entering an OPC Server FF resource ID the following message appears:

You did not enter an OPC Server FF resource ID

A resource ID for the OPC Server FF is only required on those nodes that are going to act as a Connectivity Server FF. Close the dialog by clicking Yes and type in a resource ID, refer to OPC Server FF Settings on page 142.

Table 33. OPC Server Resource IDs (Continued)

Dialog element Description

Page 144: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Registration Overview Section 11 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration

144 3BSE034678R4101

Page 145: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 145

Section 12 HART Device Integration

IntroductionThis section describes how to install the HART Device Integration. This software provides a set of software components for efficient planning, operation, and monitoring of HART field devices within the 800xA System. It consists of the following:

• Fieldbus Builder PROFIBUS/HART with OPC Server - Aspect System according to FDT 1.2 standard for engineering of smart field devices within the 800xA System. The OPC Server provides for easy data exchange between smart field devices and Asset Optimization applications without special adjustments.

• Basic HART DTM - Basic DTM for configuration, observation, diagnostic display etc. of HART compatible field devices.

• S800 I/O DTM - Device Type Manager for configuration, observation, maintenance, etc. of S800 I/O modules and communication interfaces.

• S900 DP DTM - Device Type Manager for configuration, observation, maintenance, etc. of a S900 Station.

• HART Device Integration Library - Library providing easy access to built-in system extensions, such as Asset Management.

• HART Multiplexer Connect - Support of HART Multiplexer for configuration, calibration, diagnosis etc. of HART devices, connected to non-800xA System DCS/PLCs.

This package may contain vendor specific DTMs, for which additional licensing may be necessary. For latest information, please refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - Device Management, HART, Release Notes.

Page 146: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 12 HART Device Integration

146 3BSE034678R4101

Install this software on all 800xA System nodes when HART field devices are being used. For this software release, all components are installed on all node types, except thin client nodes.

Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

InstallationTo install the HART software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

DevMgmt2

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: The check boxes for all components are selected for installation by default. If PROFIBUS Device Integration is already installed, deselect the following components:

– ABB FDT Shared Components.– ABB FDT Base Container.– ABB Fieldbus Builder PROFIBUS/HART with OPC Server.– ABB S800 IO DTM.– ABB S900 IO DTM.

otherwise, do not deselect any components.

b. Confirm Selection dialog: If the confirmation dialog indicates that one or several components have been installed already, ignore this warning and proceed with the installation process. The installation process will resolve this situation, described as follows:

– Integrity and version checks are done during installation to assure that all components can be installed. For each component, a progress bar is displayed indicating the remaining time needed for installation.

Page 147: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 12 HART Device Integration Installation

3BSE034678R4101 147

– If the component is detected as already being installed in an equal version, the component will be installed again and the setup will continue.

– If a different version of the component is detected as already being installed, The Setup - Error Message dialog appears informing about a version conflict as shown in Figure 17.

– When the installation is finished, a green check mark for each component appears in the Welcome dialog. The check mark indicates that the component has been processed.

Figure 17. Version conflict of a component

If the Setup - Error Message dialog shown in Figure 17 appears, conflicting components must be removed manually before restarting the setup. Use the Add/Remove Programs utility in Windows Control Panel.

Green check marks in the Welcome dialog does not necessarily mean that the installation for the component was successful. If integrity or version check errors appeared during installation, the whole installation process must be repeated.

Page 148: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 12 HART Device Integration

148 3BSE034678R4101

Page 149: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 149

Section 13 PROFIBUS Device Integration

IntroductionThe PROFIBUS Device Integration software provides a set of software components for efficient planning, operation, and monitoring of PROFIBUS field devices within the 800xA System. It includes:

• Fieldbus Builder PROFIBUS/HART - Aspect System according to FDT 1.2 standard for engineering of smart field devices within the 800xA System.

• S800 I/O DTM - Device Type Manager for configuration, observation, maintenance, etc. of S800 I/O modules and communication interfaces.

• S900 DP DTM - Device Type Manager for configuration, observation, maintenance, etc. of a S900 Station.

• PROFIBUS Device Integration Library - Library providing easy access to built-in system extensions such as Asset Management.

• Basic PROFIBUS DTM/PROFIBUS DTM Builder - Device Type Manager for configuration, commissioning, and diagnosis of PROFIBUS devices

Install this software on all 800xA System nodes when PROFIBUS field devices are being used. For this software release, all components are installed on all node types, except thin client nodes.

Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

This software may contain vendor specific DTMs, for which additional licensing may be necessary. For latest information, please refer to the Industrial IT, 800xA - Device Management, PROFIBUS, Release Notes.

Page 150: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 13 PROFIBUS Device Integration

150 3BSE034678R4101

InstallationTo install this software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

DevMgmt1

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: The check boxes for all components are selected for installation by default. If HART Device Integration is already installed, deselect the following components:

– ABB FDT Shared Components.– ABB FDT Base Container.– ABB Fieldbus Builder PROFIBUS/HART.– ABB S800 IO DTM.– ABB S900 IO DTM.

otherwise, do not deselect any components.

b. Confirm Selection dialog: If the confirmation dialog indicates that one or several components have been installed already, ignore this warning and proceed with the installation process. The installation process will resolve this situation, described as follows:

– Integrity and version checks are done during installation to assure that all components can be installed. For each component, a progress bar is displayed indicating the remaining time needed for installation.

– If the component is detected as already being installed in an equal version, the component will be installed again and the setup will continue.

Page 151: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 13 PROFIBUS Device Integration Installation

3BSE034678R4101 151

– If a different version of the component is detected as already being installed, The Setup - Error Message dialog appears informing about a version conflict as shown in Figure 18.

– When the installation is finished, a green check mark for each component appears in the Welcome dialog. The check mark indicates that the component has been processed.

Figure 18. Version conflict of a component

If the Setup - Error Message dialog shown in Figure 18 appears, conflicting components must be removed manually before restarting the setup. Use the Add/Remove Programs utility in Windows Control Panel.

Green check marks in the Welcome dialog does not necessarily mean that the installation for the component was successful. If integrity or version check errors appeared during installation, the whole installation process must be repeated.

PROFIBUS Device Integration requires that the HART Device Integration Library be installed on the 800xA System nodes. Follow the installation instructions in Section 12, HART Device Integration.

Page 152: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 13 PROFIBUS Device Integration

152 3BSE034678R4101

Page 153: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 153

Section 14 800xA for Advant Master

IntroductionThis section describes how to install 800xA for Advant Master. Install this software on all nodes in systems that use the AC 400 Controller with Master software or the MasterPiece 200/1 Controller.

System Configuration800xA for Advant Master requires the Real Time Accelerator (RTA) interface board PU515. This is a PCI-type board, and must be installed in the Connectivity Server computer. It has two redundant bus connectors. The software on the RTA board is automatically loaded when the 800xA for Advant Master software is started in the Connectivity Server.

The RTA Board (PU515 PCI-type) must be installed before installing the 800xA for Advant Master software.

The installation of 800xA for Advant Master must be done in two steps. Version 4.0 must be installed followed by Version 4.1.

Hyperthreading and dual processing must be disabled on the node before installing the RTA Board (refer to Disable Hyperthreading on page 68).

Page 154: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Software Installation Section 14 800xA for Advant Master

154 3BSE034678R4101

Figure 19 shows an example of a control system with MB 300 Control Network.

Software InstallationTo install the software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects1\AC 400 Connect\AC 400 Connect 4.0.0.1

3. Double-click Setup.exe to begin the installation.

TC05715A

Figure 19. Control System with MB 300 Control Network Example

Page 155: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 14 800xA for Advant Master Software Installation

3BSE034678R4101 155

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the 800xA for Advant Master check box.

b. Select Components dialog: Select which options to install (Figure 20). Use this dialog to select the RTA Board Support option. Use the following as guidelines:

– If the station will be used as a Connectivity Server or a combined Aspect Server and Connectivity Server, right-click on AC 400 Connect, select Install entire feature, and click Next.

– If the station will be used as a Client or Aspect Server only, click Next.

– The selection of components to install can be reset to the default selection by clicking Reset.

– To see the amount of disk space required for the installation, click Disk Usage.

– To change the default installation path, click Browse and type in another destination directory.

TC05730A

Figure 20. Select Components Dialog

Page 156: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Software Installation Section 14 800xA for Advant Master

156 3BSE034678R4101

c. RTA Driver Install dialog and Hardware Installation dialog: If the RTA Board Support is to be installed, the message shown in Figure 21 will appear followed by the Hardware Installation dialog shown in Figure 22. Click Continue Anyway in the Hardware Installation dialog to install the RTA Board device driver.

d. System Settings Change dialog: If this dialog appears before the Installation Successful dialog, asking to restart the computer now, click No.

e. Installation Successful dialog: Click Finish to proceed. When a dialog appears after the Installation Successful dialog, asking to restart the computer now, Click Yes.

5. To verify the installation, when the computer restarts, use Add/Remove Programs in Windows Control Panel to verify that 800xA for Advant Master appears in the list.

TC05732A

Figure 21. RTA Driver Install Message

TC05733A

Figure 22. Hardware Installation Dialog

Page 157: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 14 800xA for Advant Master Configurations for More than 20 Controllers

3BSE034678R4101 157

6. Repeat the procedure to install Version 4.1, except in Step 2 use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects1\AC 400 Connect\AC 400 Connect 4.0.0.1 SP1

Configurations for More than 20 ControllersThere are two configuration possibilities if it is desired to connect more than 20 controllers to one system:

• A second Connectivity Server (single or redundant pair) can be connected to support up to an additional 20 controllers.

• Split the MB 300 Control Network into two or several networks (maximum of six). The multiple Connectivity Servers function allows several MB 300 Control Networks to be connected from a common 800xA System.

Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup for configuration details. Do not exceed the maximum number of tags allowed for an 800xA System.

AC 800M as a Gate Between MB 300 Control NetworksData sets and clock synchronization messages can be transferred between two MB 300 Control Networks using an AC 800M connected to both MB 300 networks via two separate CI855 modules.

The Select Components dialog described in Step 4b and shown in Figure 20 is not applicable for installation of Version 4.1 and will therefore not be displayed during this installation.

Page 158: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

AC 800M as a Gate Between MB 300 Control Networks Section 14 800xA for Advant Master

158 3BSE034678R4101

Page 159: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 159

Section 15 800xA for DCI

IntroductionThe 800xA for DCI software product integrates the Harmony Distributed Control Unit (DCU) controllers with the 800xA System.

Composer CTK SoftwareComposer CTK Version 5.1 software is required on at least one node within a system.

Redundant Connections to Harmony DCUsThe ABB ECCP Ethernet Controller board is the only way that a redundant connection can be made to Harmony DCU controllers. 800xA for DCI is fully compatible with the ECCP board. An ECCP board must be installed in each DCI Connectivity Server node for redundant communication. For detailed instructions on installing the ECCP board, refer to Appendix B in Conductor NT (Version 5.0) Introduction and Installation. Refer to Table 34 for default IP addresses for each DCI Connectivity Server.

The node does not have to have 800xA for DCI software installed.

800xA for DCI software can be installed on a node that has Conductor NT or Composer CTK software.

Table 34. 800xA for DCI Connectivity Default IP Addresses

Item Host Name IP Address

DCI Primary Connectivity Server 1 DCI1 40.0.20.1

Page 160: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 15 800xA for DCI

160 3BSE034678R4101

Installation

Perform the following steps:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects2\DCI Connect

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following if the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Select Features dialog: Any combination of installation types can be selected for each node that 800xA for DCI is to be installed on. Refer to Table 35 for more information when choosing the installation features.

DCI Secondary Connectivity Server 1 DCI2 40.0.20.2

DCI Primary Connectivity Server 2 DCI3 40.0.20.3

DCI Secondary Connectivity Server 2 DCI4 40.0.20.4

DCI Primary Connectivity Server 3 DCI5 40.0.20.5

DCI Secondary Connectivity Server 3 DCI6 40.0.20.6

DCI Primary Connectivity Server 4 DCI7 40.0.20.7

DCI Secondary Connectivity Server 4 DCI8 40.0.20.8

Table 35. Installation Features

Installation Type Description

DCI Connectivity Server

The 800xA for DCI Connectivity Server feature provides all components needed to communicate from the 800xA System to Harmony DCU controllers. Select this feature for each 800xA for DCI Connectivity Server.

Table 34. 800xA for DCI Connectivity Default IP Addresses (Continued)

Item Host Name IP Address

Page 161: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 15 800xA for DCI Installation

3BSE034678R4101 161

b. Select Node and Console Group Number dialog:

Enter the DCI Network Services Node Number and Console Group Number information, using the following guidelines:

– Select a unique node number for each computer. It can be the same node number that is assigned to a Conductor NT or Composer CTK node, but must be unique for each node within the 800xA System.

– Select the console group number (as used with Conductor NT/UX) for this node. The group number will determine the console group for synchronizing global tables.

DCI Client The 800xA for DCI Client feature provides all components needed to use 800xA for DCI aspects on 800xA Clients. Install this feature on every 800xA Client where it is desired to view and use 800xA for DCI aspects.

If only installing the DCI Client feature on this node, or if installing 800xA for DCI with Conductor NT or Composer CTK already installed on this node, the Select Node and Console Group dialog will not appear.

Table 35. Installation Features (Continued)

Installation Type Description

Page 162: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 15 800xA for DCI

162 3BSE034678R4101

Page 163: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 163

Section 16 800xA for Harmony

IntroductionThis section describes how to install 800xA for Harmony. 800xA for Harmony provides connectivity to the Symphony™ Harmony Distributed Control System (DCS).

There are several prerequisite setup procedures that must be completed before installing the software.

Prerequisite Setup

The following prerequisite setup procedures must be completed before you install the 800xA for Harmony software:

• Create Accounts and Users on page 163.• DCOM Settings on page 166.

Create Accounts and Users

Local service accounts must be created for use with certain software installations associated with 800xA for Harmony on the Connectivity Server and Configuration Server nodes. Local service accounts are not required on Client nodes. Read and perform the procedures in this section if 800xA for Harmony is being installed.

Excel Data Access (DataDirect) and Application Scheduler must be installed if SOE Reports are to be used. Information Management must be installed if SOE Report archival is desired.

Page 164: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Create Accounts and Users Section 16 800xA for Harmony

164 3BSE034678R4101

Local Service Accounts

The local service account must be used during the installation of Microsoft SQL Server and 800xA for Harmony software. This account is required on all nodes designated as Connectivity Server and Configuration Server installation setup types. The same user name and password must be used for each one. The local service account must be a member of the local administrator group.

1. Use standard Windows procedures to access Windows Control Panel.

2. Select:

Administrative Tools > Computer Management > System Tools > Local Users and Groups

3. Right click the Users folder and select New User from the context menu.

4. Enter the appropriate information in these fields: User Name, Full Name (optional), Description (optional), Password (required), and Confirm Password (required).

5. Disable User Must Change Password At Next Logon.

6. Enable User Cannot Change Password and Password Never Expires.

7. Click Create.

8. Open the Users folder.

9. Right click the name of the account that was just created and select Properties.

10. Windows 2000 Server users, continue with Step 11 through Step 14. Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step i:

a. Select the Member Of tab.

b. Click Users.

c. Click the Add button.

d. Click the Advanced button.

e. Ensure that the Object Type is set to Groups and the Location is set to the local node name.

f. Click Find Now.

Page 165: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony Create Accounts and Users

3BSE034678R4101 165

g. Double-click Administrators.

h. Close out of all dialogs. Click OK when closing each dialog.

i. Continue to Assign User Administrative Rights.

11. From the Member Of tab, click Add.

12. Double-click Administrators.

13. Click OK.

14. Click Apply.

Assign User Administrative Rights

1. Use standard Windows procedures to access:

Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy

2. Double-click the Local Policies folder.

3. Select the User Rights Assignment folder.

4. Double-click Act As Part Of The Operating System from the Policy list.

5. Windows 2000 Server users, continue with Step 6 through Step 13. Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step l:

a. Click Add User or Group.

b. Click Locations.

c. If prompted for an account, enter the name and password of a domain administrator account.

d. Select the local computer.

e. Click OK.

f. Click Advanced.

g. Click Find Now.

h. Double-click the local services account created previously.

i. Click OK.

j. Click Apply.

Page 166: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

DCOM Settings Section 16 800xA for Harmony

166 3BSE034678R4101

k. Click OK.

l. Continue to Step 11.

6. Click Add.

7. Set the Look In field to the local computer name (a Domain Controller defaults to the name of the domain).

8. Double-click the name of the user account created previously.

9. Click OK.

10. Click OK in the Local Security Policy Setting dialog.

11. Select Generate Security Audits from the Policy list.

– Windows 2000 Server users, perform Step 6 through Step 10.– Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step l of Step 5.

12. Select Log On As A Service from the Policy list.

– Windows 2000 Server users, perform Step 6 through Step 10.– Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step l of Step 5.

13. Select Impersonate a Client after Authentication from the Policy list.

– Windows 2000 Server users, perform Step 6 through Step 10.– Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step l of Step 5.

DCOM Settings

DCOM settings must be configured on Connectivity Servers only. Perform the following steps:

1. Select:

Start > Run

The Run dialog appears.

2. Enter dcomcnfg in the Run dialog and click OK.

3. Windows 2000 Server users, proceed to Step 6. Windows Server 2003 users, continue with Step 4.

Page 167: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony DCOM Settings

3BSE034678R4101 167

4. The Component Services dialog appears. Expand:

Component Services > Computers > My Computer

5. Right Click on My Computer and select Properties from the context menu that appears.

6. Select the Default Properties tab.

7. Select Enable Distributed COM on This Computer.

8. Set the Default Authentication Level to None.

9. Select the Default Protocols tab.

10. Verify Connection-oriented TCP/IP is the only configured protocol. Delete any other protocol found.

11. Windows 2000 Server users, select the Default Security tab. Windows Server 2003 users, select the Default COM Security tab.

12. Windows 2000 Server users, select Edit Default in the Default Access Permissions section of the tab. Windows Server 2003 users, select Edit Default in the Access Permissions section of the tab.

13. Click Add.

14. Windows 2000 Server users only, set the List Names From drop-down list box to the local node name.

15. Windows 2000 Server users perform Step 16 through Step 18. Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step h:

a. Click Locations.

b. If prompted for an account, enter the name and password of a domain administrator account.

c. Select the local computer and click OK.

d. Click Advanced.

e. Click Find Now.

f. Select the local services account created previously.

g. Click OK in all dialogs (there are 4).

h. Continue to Installation on page 168.

Page 168: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 16 800xA for Harmony

168 3BSE034678R4101

16. Select Show Users list to show all available users and double-click the name of the local services account created previously.

17. Select Allow Access as the Types Of Access.

18. Click OK.

19. Reboot the node for new DCOM settings to take effect.

InstallationThis section describes how to install the 800xA for Harmony software.

To begin the 800xA for Harmony software installation:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects2\Harmony Connect

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Click Next in the Welcome dialog.

5. The Customer Information dialog appears. Enter the User Name and Company Name.

6. Select Anyone who uses this computer (all users) and click Next.

7. The License Agreement dialog appears. Read the agreement and click Yes to accept the terms of agreement and continue, or click No if you do not accept. By clicking No you will exit the setup.

8. The Choose Destination Location dialog appears. To install to the default folder, click Next. To install to a different folder, click Browse, choose the folder, and click Next.

Use the 800xA for Harmony local service account during the 800xA for Harmony Connectivity Server and Configuration Server installation setup types. Use the Installing User account for Client node installation setup types.

Close all open applications before installing the 800xA for Harmony software.

For all 800xA for Harmony installations, install the 800xA for Harmony Client software installation setup type on all nodes as a minimum.

Page 169: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony Setup Type Selection

3BSE034678R4101 169

Setup Type Selection

1. Use the Setup Type Selection dialog (Figure 23) to select the setup type based on the node type where you are currently installing the software.

2. Select Next and go to the heading of the selected setup type:

– Configuration Server Setup Type on page 170.– Configuration Server with Connectivity Server Setup Type on page 174.– Connectivity Server Setup Type on page 176.– Client Setup Type on page 177.

Setup type 1 or 2 (Configuration Server or Configuration Server with Connectivity Server) must be installed and activated before any other setup type (3 or 4) is installed. Install only one Configuration Server (setup type 1 or 2) per system.

TC04441C

Figure 23. Setup Type Selection

Page 170: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Configuration Server Setup Type Section 16 800xA for Harmony

170 3BSE034678R4101

Configuration Server Setup Type

Perform the following steps:

1. If more than one Network Identification Card (NIC) exists, select the appropriate IP address for Harmony time synchronization when prompted and select Next (Figure 24).

2. Enter the name of the 800xA for Harmony local service account and password.

3. Click Next.

4. Read the Important Installation Information dialog. Click Yes to continue the installation or No to abort.

5. The Configuration Server Setup dialog appears. Select the location for the Harmony SQL database disk partition and click Next.

6. Click Next in the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard dialog.

TC06053A

Figure 24. Select IP Address

If you want to exit the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard without setting up a plan, click Cancel and continue to Step 25.

Page 171: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server Setup Type

3BSE034678R4101 171

7. In the Select Databases dialog, verify the settings are identical to those shown in Figure 25 and click Next.

8. In the Update Data Optimization Information dialog, enable the Update Statistics Used By Query Optimizer check box.

9. Set the % of the Database field to 100.

10. Click Next.

11. In the Database Integrity Check dialog, verify the settings are identical to those shown in Figure 26 and click Next.

TC04546A

Figure 25. Configuration Server Option

TC02513B

Figure 26. Database Integrity Tests

Page 172: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Configuration Server Setup Type Section 16 800xA for Harmony

172 3BSE034678R4101

12. In the Specify The Database Backup Plan dialog, ensure Back Up The Database As Part Of The Maintenance Plan and Verify The Integrity Of The Backup When Complete are enabled.

13. Select the backup media (tape or disk).

14. Select the Change button and edit the frequency at which backups are automatically performed in the Edit Recurring Job Schedule dialog.

15. Click OK.

16. Click Next.

17. In the Specify Backup Disk Directory dialog, verify the settings are identical to those shown in Figure 27 and click Next.

A hard drive is recommended to be used. This must be a hard drive with sufficient space to contain the backup data.

Schedule a weekly frequency for only a few configuration changes and schedule a daily backup for many configuration changes.

Backups should be scheduled for low load time periods because they affect performance.

Old files can be deleted manually. Either way, it is important to maintain sufficient hard drive space.

TC08119A

Figure 27. Specify Backup Disk Directory

Page 173: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server Setup Type

3BSE034678R4101 173

18. Click Next in the Specify The Transaction Log Backup Plan dialog.

19. In the Reports To Generate dialog, verify the settings are identical to those shown in Figure 28.

20. In the Maintenance Plan History dialog, select the check box Write history to the server (to msdb.dbo.sysdbmaintplan_history table).

21. Set a limit to the number of rows that each history table can hold to prevent the table from growing too large and filling the MSDB database. The default of 1,000 is sufficient.

22. Click Next.

23. Enter a plan name and click Finish.

24. Click OK when prompted that the maintenance plan has been successfully created.

25. Click Finish in the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog.

26. Continue to Configure Access Rights on page 177.

TC02515B

Figure 28. Report Storage Configuration

Page 174: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Configuration Server with Connectivity Server Setup Type Section 16 800xA for Harmony

174 3BSE034678R4101

Configuration Server with Connectivity Server Setup Type

Perform the following steps:

1. If more than one Network Identification Card (NIC) exists, select the appropriate IP address for Harmony time synchronization when prompted and select Next (Figure 24).

2. Enter the name of the 800xA for Harmony local service account and password.

3. Click Next.

4. Read the Important Installation Information dialog. Click Yes to continue the installation or No to abort.

5. If using this procedure as part of an upgrade, perform Step 6 and then continue with Step 7. If using this procedure as part of a normal installation, skip Step 6 and continue with Step 7.

6. When prompted to reuse the SQL Database files, select either Yes to reuse them or select No to move them to another hard drive.

7. Configure a logical computer interface module (Figure 29).

If No is selected, another dialog appears requesting the new hard drive location for the files. Select the location and click Next.

TC00641C

Figure 29. Logical ICI Configuration

Page 175: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony Configuration Server with Connectivity Server Setup Type

3BSE034678R4101 175

a. Accept the logical computer interface module number currently displayed.

b. Enter a brief description of the computer interface module.

c. Enter the name of the 800xA for Harmony Server node that will supply the runtime information.

d. Select Local in the Network Communication Protocol pull-down list.

e. Select the appropriate Physical ICI Device from the pull-down list (for example: S003 for SCSI INICI03).

f. Click Save and then OK.

g. Click Quit.

8. If using this procedure as part of an upgrade, continue with Step 9. If using this procedure as part of a normal installation, skip Step 9 and continue with Step 10.

9. A dialog appears stating that a Database Maintenance Plan already exists, do you want to create a new one (Y/N). Select either No to reuse the existing one and continue to Step 12 or select Yes to create a new one and continue to Step 10.

10. Click Next in the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard dialog.

11. Perform Step 7 through Step 25 of the Configuration Server Setup Type procedure.

12. Continue to Configure Access Rights on page 177.

If you want to exit the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard without creating a plan, click Cancel and continue to Step 12.

Page 176: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Connectivity Server Setup Type Section 16 800xA for Harmony

176 3BSE034678R4101

Connectivity Server Setup Type

Perform the following steps:

1. Select the default option in Figure 30 unless making this node a backup Connectivity Server and click Next.

2. If more than one Network Identification Card (NIC) exists, select the appropriate IP address for Harmony time synchronization when prompted and select Next (Figure 24).

3. Enter the name of the 800xA for Harmony local service account and password.

4. Click Next.

5. Select the name of the Configuration Server in the drop-down list box and click Next.

6. For a Backup Connectivity Server installation, skip to Step 10. Otherwise, perform Step 7 of the Configuration Server with Connectivity Server Setup Type procedure.

7. Click Next in the SemAPI Setup Welcome dialog.

When selecting Backup Connectivity Server, select the name of the Primary Connectivity Server from the drop-down list box.

TC08118A

Figure 30. Connectivity Server Role

Page 177: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 16 800xA for Harmony Client Setup Type

3BSE034678R4101 177

8. Select a location for the SemAPI data files and development system in the Select Destination Location dialog.

9. Click Next.

10. Click Finish in the Setup Complete dialog.

11. Continue to Configure Access Rights on page 177.

Client Setup Type

Click Finish when prompted that 800xA for Harmony installation is complete.

Configure Access RightsAll Industrial IT users require read access to the Configuration Server and SQL Server databases for 800xA for Harmony. To configure access rights for read access, perform the following steps on all 800xA for Harmony Connectivity servers:

1. Log in as the Installing User.

2. Open the SQL Server Enterprise Manager. Select:

Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Enterprise Manager

3. Expand the listing to the view the following directory (Figure 31):

Microsoft SQL Servers\SQL Server Group\(local)\Security

4. Right click Logins and select New Login from the context menu.

5. Search in the Name field for the domain name.

6. Ensure the domain name is displayed in the List Names From drop-down list.

7. From the SQL Server Login Properties - New Login dialog, select IndustrialITUser and click Add.

8. Click OK.

9. In the Authentication section of the dialog, select Windows Authentication and Grant Access radial boxes.

10. Select the Database Access tab from the same dialog.

The recommended location should be in the same relative path as the 800xA for Harmony installation path.

Page 178: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Configure Access Rights Section 16 800xA for Harmony

178 3BSE034678R4101

11. Verify the settings are identical to those shown in Figure 32.

12. Repeat Step 11 using model and click OK.

TC02517B

Figure 31. SQL Server Enterprise Manager

2.

If the databases are not present, follow the steps for the existing databases and continue. The missing databases will be automatically added and configured. New databases may not show the enabled status until the workstation is restarted.

TC5247A

Figure 32. Enable Permit Box

Page 179: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 179

Section 17 800xA for Melody

IntroductionThis section describes how to install 800xA for Melody. 800xA for Melody provides connectivity to the Melody Distributed Control System (DCS).

800xA for Melody is installed on all 800xA System nodes when Melody controllers are being used. Install the primary (or backup) server component on Connectivity Servers, and the client component on all other 800xA System nodes. How to select the type of installation is covered later in the installation procedure.

There are several prerequisite setup procedures to complete before installing the software. These are described in Prerequisite Setup on page 179.

Prerequisite SetupThe following prerequisite setup procedures must be completed BEFORE installing the 800xA for Melody software:

• Create Accounts And Users on page 179.• DCOM Settings on page 182.• Regional Settings on page 184.

Create Accounts And Users

The local service account must be used during the installation of Microsoft SQL Server and 800xA for Melody software. This account is required on all Melody Connectivity Servers in the system. The same user name and password must be used on all Melody Connectivity Servers. The 800xA for Melody local service account must be a member of the local administrator group.

The installation of 800xA for Melody must be done in two steps. Version 4.0 must be installed followed by Version 4.1.

Page 180: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Create Accounts And Users Section 17 800xA for Melody

180 3BSE034678R4101

1. Use standard Windows procedures to access Windows Control Panel.

2. Select:

Administrative Tools > Computer Management > System Tools > Local Users and Groups

3. Right click the Users folder and select New User from the context menu.

4. Enter the appropriate information in these fields: User Name, Full Name (optional), Description (optional), Password (required), and Confirm Password (required).

5. Disable User Must Change Password At Next Logon.

6. Enable User Cannot Change Password and Password Never Expires.

7. Click Create.

8. Open the Users folder.

9. Right click on the name of the account that was just created and select Properties.

10. Windows 2000 Server users, go to Step 11. Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step i:

a. Select the Member Of tab.

b. Click Users.

c. Click the Add button.

d. Click the Advanced button.

e. Ensure that the Object Type is set to Groups and the Location is set to the local node name.

f. Click Find Now.

g. Double-click Administrators.

h. Close out of all dialogs. Click OK when closing each dialog.

i. Continue to Step 15.

11. From the Member Of tab, click Add.

Page 181: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Create Accounts And Users

3BSE034678R4101 181

12. Double-click Administrators.

13. Click OK.

14. Click Apply.

15. Use standard Windows procedures to access:

Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy

16. Double-click the Local Policies folder.

17. Select the User Rights Assignment folder.

18. Double-click Act As Part Of The Operating System from the Policy list.

19. Windows 2000 Server users, continue with Step 20 through Step 27. Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step l:

a. Click Add User or Group.

b. Click Locations.

c. If prompted for an account, enter the name and password of a domain administrator account.

d. Select the local computer.

e. Click OK.

f. Click Advanced.

g. Click Find Now.

h. Double-click the local services account created previously.

i. Click OK.

j. Click Apply.

k. Click OK.

l. Continue to Step 25.

20. Click Add.

21. Set the Look In field to the local computer name (a Domain Controller defaults to the name of the domain).

Page 182: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

DCOM Settings Section 17 800xA for Melody

182 3BSE034678R4101

22. Double-click the name of the user account created previously.

23. Click OK.

24. Click OK in the Local Security Policy Setting dialog.

25. Select Generate Security Audits from the Policy list.

– Windows 2000 Server users, perform Step 20 through Step 24.– Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through l of Step 19.

26. Select Log On As A Service from the Policy list.

– Windows 2000 Server users, perform Step 20 through Step 24.– Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through l of Step 19.

27. Select Impersonate a Client after Authentication from the Policy list.

– Windows 2000 Server users, perform Step 20 through Step 24.– Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through l of Step 19.

DCOM Settings

DCOM settings must be configured on Melody Connectivity Servers and Melody Config Servers only. Perform the following steps:

1. Select:

Start > Run

The Run dialog appears.

2. Enter dcomcnfg in the Run dialog and click OK.

3. Windows 2000 Server users, proceed to Step 6. Windows Server 2003 users, continue with Step 4.

4. The Component Services dialog appears. Expand:

Component Services > Computers >My Computer

5. Right Click on My Computer and select Properties from the context menu that appears.

6. Select the Default Properties tab.

7. Select Enable Distributed COM on This Computer.

Page 183: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody DCOM Settings

3BSE034678R4101 183

8. Set the Default Authentication Level to None.

9. Select the Default Protocols tab.

10. Verify Connection-oriented TCP/IP is the only configured protocol. Delete any other protocol found.

11. Windows 2000 Server users, select the Default Security tab. Windows Server 2003 users, select the Default COM Security tab.

12. Windows 2000 Server users, select Edit Default in the Default Access Permissions section of the tab. Windows Server 2003 users, select Edit Default in the Access Permissions section of the tab.

13. Click Add.

14. Windows 2000 Server users only, set the List Names From drop-down list box to the local node name.

15. Windows 2000 Server users perform Step 16 through Step 18. Windows Server 2003 users, perform Step a through Step h:

a. Click Locations.

b. If prompted for an account, enter the name and password of a domain administrator account.

c. Select the local computer and click OK.

d. Click Advanced.

e. Click Find Now.

f. Select the local services account created previously.

g. Click OK in all dialogs (there are 4).

h. Continue to Installation on page 184.

16. Select Show Users list to show all available users and double-click the name of the local services account created previously.

17. Select Allow Access as the Types Of Access.

18. Click OK.

19. Reboot the node for new DCOM settings to take effect.

Page 184: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Regional Settings Section 17 800xA for Melody

184 3BSE034678R4101

Regional Settings

The Regional Windows settings must be set to English (United States). Using other languages for the keyboard is possible.

The Regional Windows settings are accessed as follows:

• Windows 2000 Server:

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional Options

• Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:

Start > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options

InstallationThis section describes how to install the 800xA for Melody software.

Refer to Figure 33 for an overview of the necessary installation sequence of the server and operator workstations.

Figure 33. Installation Overview Flowchart

Page 185: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Installation

3BSE034678R4101 185

To begin the 800xA for Melody software installation:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects1\Melody Connect 4.0.0.0

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. The Customer Information dialog appears. Enter the User Name and Company Name.

5. Select Anyone who uses this computer (all users).

6. Click Next.

7. The License Agreement dialog appears. Read the agreement and click Accept to accept the terms of agreement and continue, or click Decline if you do not accept. By clicking Decline you will exit the setup.

8. The Choose Destination Location dialog appears. To install to the default folder, click Next. To install to a different folder, click Browse, choose the folder, and click Next.

9. Continue to Setup Type Selection.

Use the local 800xA for Melody service account for 800xA for Melody Server installation.

For all 800xA for Melody installations, load the 800xA for Melody software on all nodes.

For all 800xA for Melody nodes, install 800xA Process Portal.

When prompted to enter a drive for installation always select drive c:

Close all open applications before installing 800xA for Melody software.

The installation of 800xA for Melody Version 4.0 must be complete before installing 800xA for Melody Version 4.1. For installation of Version 4.1, refer to 800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation on page 200.

Page 186: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Setup Type Selection Section 17 800xA for Melody

186 3BSE034678R4101

Setup Type Selection

Use the Setup Type Selection dialog, Figure 34, to select the correct setup type based on the node type where you are currently installing the 800xA for Melody software. Refer to Table 36 for guidelines.

Table 36. Setup Type Selections

Setup Type Software Description

Melody System Extension

For Aspect Server, and other system nodes that are not a Melody Connectivity or Configuration Server. Refer to Melody System Extension on page 187.

Config Server For the Configuration Server. Refer to Melody Config Server on page 187.

Melody Connectivity Server

For Melody Connectivity Server. Refer to Melody Connectivity Server on page 196.

TC05804A

Figure 34. Setup Type Selection Dialog

Page 187: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Setup Type Selection

3BSE034678R4101 187

Melody System Extension

This installs the Melody System Extensions (Object types) to the Aspect Server:

1. Select the Melody System Extension setup type and click Next.

2. Click Finish when prompted that the 800xA for Melody software installation is complete.

3. Restart the node.

Melody Config Server

This installs the Melody Config Server (Table 36):

1. Select the Config Server setup type and click Next.

2. Select the network interface to use for time synchronization and click Next.

3. The Service Account Information dialog appears. Enter the name of the 800xA for Melody service account and password.

4. Click Next.

5. Click Yes to continue.

6. Select the SQL Database Disk Partition.

7. Click Next. A series of message boxes that indicate setup progress appear. When this set up is done the Configure Publishing and Distribution Wizard dialog appears.

8. Click Next in the welcome dialog for the Configure Publishing and Distribution Wizard.

For new 800xA for Melody installations, the Config Server installation must be done prior to the installation of the Melody System Extension.

Do not use the Melody Control Network.

For best performance use a drive that differs from the operating system drive on the raid machine. (For more information about the raid machine please refer to the IndustrialIT 800xA System documentation).

Page 188: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Setup Type Selection Section 17 800xA for Melody

188 3BSE034678R4101

9. Select this server as its own distributor as shown in Figure 35, and click Next.

10. Specify the snapshot folder as shown in Figure 36. The snapshot stores the SQL server table structure and is necessary to run the SQL server.

TC05791A

Figure 35. SQL Distributor Selection

TC05792A

Figure 36. Snapshot Folder Specification

Page 189: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Setup Type Selection

3BSE034678R4101 189

11. Click Next and then Yes.

12. Click No, use the default settings for publishing and distribution (Figure 37) and click Next.

13. Click Finish when prompted that the Configure Publishing and Distribution Wizard is ready for completing.

14. Click OK to quit the information that the Config Server is enabled as Distributor for itself.

15. The Database Maintenance Plan Wizard dialog appears. Click Next.

TC05793A

Figure 37. Customize SQL Publish and Distribution Settings

If a previous maintenance plan exists, configure this maintenance plan to minimize the redundant saving of data.

Page 190: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Setup Type Selection Section 17 800xA for Melody

190 3BSE034678R4101

16. For optimal performance, create a maintenance plan for the Config Server. Select the Database check box for ConfigServer to be part of the maintenance plan as shown in Figure 38.

17. Click Next.

18. Select the Update Statistics Used By Query Optimizer check box.

19. Set the % Of Database field to 100.

20. Click Next to continue.

TC05794A

Figure 38. Database Option

Page 191: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Setup Type Selection

3BSE034678R4101 191

21. The Database Integrity Checks dialog appears. Verify Check Database Integrity and Perform These Tests Before Doing Backups check boxes, and Include Indexes, are selected as shown in Figure 39.

22. Click Next to continue.

23. In the next dialog, verify Back Up The Database As Part Of The Maintenance Plan and Verify The Integrity Of The Backup When Complete are enabled in the Specify the Database Backup Plan dialog.

24. Select the backup media (hard disk is recommended) and click Change. This must be a disk drive with sufficient space to contain the backed up material.

Verify that the Attempt To Repair Any Minor Problems check box is not selected.

TC05795A

Figure 39. Database Integrity Tests

Page 192: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Setup Type Selection Section 17 800xA for Melody

192 3BSE034678R4101

25. Select the frequency at which backups are automatically performed in the Edit Recurring Job Schedule dialog (Figure 40) and click OK.

26. Click Next.

Schedule a weekly frequency for only a few configuration changes and schedule a daily backup for many configuration changes.

Backups should be scheduled for low load time periods because they affect performance.

TC05796A

Figure 40. Edit Recurring Job Schedule Dialog

Page 193: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Setup Type Selection

3BSE034678R4101 193

27. Verify Use The Default Backup Directory is enabled in the Specify Backup Disk Directory dialog (Figure 41).

28. Verify Create A Subdirectory For Each Database is enabled (Figure 41).

29. Verify Remove Files Older Than is enabled and specify a time period. (Figure 41).

30. Click Next.

TC05797A

Figure 41. Specify Backup Disk Directory

Old files can be manually deleted. Either way, it is important to do this step so the hard disk does not become full.

Page 194: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Setup Type Selection Section 17 800xA for Melody

194 3BSE034678R4101

31. The Specify the Transaction Log Backup Plan dialog appears, as shown in Figure 42. Verify Back Up The Transaction Log As Part Of The Maintenance Plan is not enabled.

32. Click Next.

TC05798A

Figure 42. Specify Transaction Log Backup Plan Dialog

Page 195: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Setup Type Selection

3BSE034678R4101 195

33. The Reports to Generate dialog appears, as shown in Figure 43. Verify Write A Report To A Text File In Directory is enabled and specify the directory that will hold the report in the Reports to Generate dialog.

34. Verify Delete Text Report Files Older Than is enabled, specify a time period, and click Next.

35. The Maintenance Plan History dialog appears, as shown in Figure 44. Select Write history to the server (to msdb.dbo.sysdbmaintplan_history table).

TC05799A

Figure 43. Reports to Generate Dialog

TC05800A

Figure 44. Maintenance Plan History Dialog

Page 196: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Setup Type Selection Section 17 800xA for Melody

196 3BSE034678R4101

36. Set a limit to the number of rows that each history table can hold, if necessary.

37. Click Next.

38. Enter a maintenance plan name and click Finish.

39. Click OK when prompted that the maintenance plan has been successfully installed.

40. Click Finish when prompted that the 800xA for Melody software installation is complete.

41. Restart the Config Server.

42. Continue with Configure Access Rights on page 197.

Melody Connectivity Server

To install the Melody Connectivity Server:

1. Select Melody Connectivity Server in the Setup Type dialog and click Next.

2. Select the network interface to use for time synchronization and click Next.

3. Enter the appropriate account information and click Next to continue.

4. Choose the ConfigServer location as shown in Figure 45, and click Next.

Do not use the Melody Control Network.

TC05807AA

Figure 45. Selecting Config Server as SQL Server Location

Page 197: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Configure Access Rights

3BSE034678R4101 197

5. Click Finish when the 800xA for Melody installation is complete.

6. Restart the node.

7. Continue with Configure Access Rights on page 197.

Configure Access Rights

All Industrial IT users require read access to the Config Server and SQL Server databases for Melody Connect. To configure access rights for read access, perform the following steps on all Melody Connectivity Servers:

1. Open the SQL Server Enterprise Manager by selecting:

Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Enterprise Manager.

2. Register the SQL Server using the provided wizard, if it has not already been registered.

a. Select:

Console Root > Microsoft SQL Servers > SQL Server Group.

b. Right-click on SQL Server Group.

c. Select New SQL Server Registration.

d. Click Next in the Register SQL Server Wizard.

e. Enter the SQL server name.

f. Click Add.

g. Click Next.

h. Select the first option in the Select An Authentication Mode dialog and click Next.

i. Select the first option in the Select SQL Server Group dialog and click Next.

j. Click Finish.

Page 198: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Configure Access Rights Section 17 800xA for Melody

198 3BSE034678R4101

3. Expand the listing to the view the following directory:

Microsoft SQL Servers\SQL Server Group\workstation_name\Security

as shown in Figure 46.

4. Right-click Logins and select New Login from the context menu.

5. Ensure the domain account is displayed in the List of names box.

6. Browse the Name field.

7. From the SQL Server Login Properties - New Login dialog, select IndustrialITUser and click Add.

8. Click OK.

9. Under the Authentication section of the dialog, select Windows Authentication and Grant Access radial boxes.

10. Select the Database Access tab.

TC02517B

Figure 46. SQL Server Enterprise Manager

Page 199: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody Configure Access Rights

3BSE034678R4101 199

11. Check the Permit box (Figure 47) for the ConfigServer database.

12. Enable db_datareader (Figure 47) in the Permit in Database Role field.

13. Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 using model in Step 11.

14. Click OK.

TC5247A

Figure 47. Enable Permit Box

If some of the databases are not present, follow the instructions for the existing databases and continue. The missing databases will be automatically added and configured.

Newly enabled databases may not show the enabled status until the workstation is restarted.

Page 200: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation Section 17 800xA for Melody

200 3BSE034678R4101

800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation

800xA for Melody Version 4.1 must be installed on all Aspect Server, Connectivity Server, Operator Workplace, and 800xA for Melody Config Server nodes in the 800xA System that have 800xA for Melody installed.

1. Stop 800xA System configuration and commissioning during the installation.

2. Before beginning the installation on each node, close all 800xA Operator Workplaces.

3. To install on Operator Workplace nodes and Aspect Server nodes, log on as a user with administration privileges.

4. To install on 800xA for Melody Connectivity Server nodes and the 800xA for Melody Config Server node, log on under the local 800xA for Melody Service Account.

5. Shut down all 800xA System processes. Select:

Maintenance > Stop all processes associated with the Process Portal A

in the Configuration Wizard.

6. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

7. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects1\Melody Connect 4.0.0.0 SP1

8. To install on a redundant Connectivity Server node:

– For system online update: Ensure that the redundant Connectivity Server is ONLINE and ACTIVE before beginning the installation.

– Perform the installation on the passive Connectivity Server node first.

– Restart the node after completing the installation.

The 800xA for Melody Version 4.0 installation procedures must be complete before installing 800xA for Melody Version 4.1.

Installing 800xA for Melody Version 4.1 does not require uninstalling the installed version of 800xA for Melody or deleting and recreating the existing system. There is also no requirement to perform a backup and restore of the existing 800xA System.

Page 201: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 17 800xA for Melody 800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation

3BSE034678R4101 201

– Use the Melody Server faceplate to observe the Server status (online/offline) on an Operator Workplace node.

– After the passive Connectivity Server node is running and on line again, initiate a redundancy switch over by using the Melody Server Faceplate.

– Update the now passive Connectivity Server node.

Page 202: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation Section 17 800xA for Melody

202 3BSE034678R4101

Page 203: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 203

Section 18 800xA for MOD 300

IntroductionThis section describes how to install the 800xA for MOD 300 software on an 800xA System. 800xA for MOD 300 provides integration of the 800xA system and the Advant OCS/MOD 300 control network (DCN or eDCN).

Prerequisites and RequirementsThe following prerequisites and requirements are necessary to support the 800xA for MOD 300 software.

MOD 300 System Requirements

The Advant OCS System must be at Version 14.6/x for proper connectivity and operation with 800xA for MOD 300.

One node with AdvaBuild 3.3/2 P2 or later for Windows is required by the MOD Importer application to populate the Aspect Server with MOD 300 tag data.

Software Requirements

The MOD 300 integration software requirements are shown below. Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 (US English version) and base 800xA System Version 4.1 product must already be installed to support the MOD 300 installation.

Page 204: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

RTAB Requirements Section 18 800xA for MOD 300

204 3BSE034678R4101

MOD 300 Client software can be loaded on top of application software packages such as Information Management. Table 37 summarizes the required software and the nodes to install the software on.

RTAB Requirements

The Real-Time Accelerator Board (RTAB) is required (PCI type only) to connect the MOD 300 Connectivity Server to the Advant OCS Control Network (MOD 300 DCN/eDCN). If the RTAB is required, install the PU514/PU514A (RTAB for DCN) or the PU515/PU515A (RTAB for eDCN) before installing the PAS System Services software. Refer to Real-Time Accelerator Board Installation on page 205. Do not use the PU518 or PU519.

The Real-time Accelerator Board is powered from the PCI bus supply in the computer. The PCI RTAB board (PU514 or PU515) requires a 5V PCI slot. Do not use the PU514 or PU515 RTAB in a PCI slot that uses the 3.3V standard. The PCI RTAB board (PU514A or PU515A) uses either a 3.3V or 5V PCI slot or PCI-X slot and replaces the PU514 / PU515.

Table 37. Software Requirements by Node Type

Software Client Connectivity

ServerAspect Server

800xA - Process Portal A 4.1 X X X

MOD PAS System Services X

800xA for MOD 300 X X X

This system will coexist with other integration packages. Specifically it can coexist with AC 800M Control Builder. The AC 800M Server node must be a separate node from the 800xA for MOD 300 node.

Page 205: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 18 800xA for MOD 300 Installation Procedure

3BSE034678R4101 205

Installation ProcedureThe following installations are supported by the 800xA for MOD 300 installation wizard.

• 800xA for MOD 300 Connectivity Server with 800xA for MOD 300 Client/Server.

• Any other 800xA System node type with the 800xA for MOD 300 Client.

Follow this general procedure to load the 800xA for MOD 300 software.

1. Install the PCI RTAB on the 800xA for MOD 300 Connectivity Server to access the Advant OCS Control Network (MOD 300 DCN). Refer to Real-Time Accelerator Board Installation on page 205. The RTAB can provide time from the MOD 300 system. Setting up time synchronization is a post installation activity. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

2. Insert the installation media and install the 800xA for MOD 300 software using the installation wizard. Refer to 800xA for MOD 300 Installation Wizard on page 206.

MOD PAS System Services is installed on the 800xA for MOD 300 Connectivity Server with 800xA for MOD 300 Client/Server.

3. Complete the post installation activities. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

Real-Time Accelerator Board InstallationThis is only required if installing a RTAB on an 800xA for MOD 300 Connectivity Server. A PCI board is used due to ease of installation, operation, and computer support. For further details regarding the RTAB, refer to the Real-Time Accelerator Board Installation Instructions.

The PCI RTAB board (PU514 or PU515) requires a 5.5V PCI slot. Do not use it in a PCI slot that uses the 3.3V standard. PU514A and PU515A support the 3.3V standard.

Page 206: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

800xA for MOD 300 Installation Wizard Section 18 800xA for MOD 300

206 3BSE034678R4101

To install the PCI-type RTAB in the computer:

1. Disconnect the computer from the power line.

2. Remove the computer cover. Refer to the computer hardware manual for details.

3. Unpack the RTAB.

4. Detach the plastic handle from the PCI RTAB, if required.

5. Remove the cover plate of the PCI slot and then mount the RTAB in that slot.

6. Install the cover on the computer according to the computer hardware manual, and then plug the computer power cord into the power line.

7. Turn on the computer.

8. Until PAS System Services are installed, Windows will try to configure the PCI RTAB board. Cancel this attempt.

800xA for MOD 300 Installation WizardTo install the software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects2\MOD Connect

3. Double click setup.exe to begin the installation.

Remove the power cord from the power line before removing the cover. There are unisolated and potentially fatal power line voltages present under the cover. Remove the power cord before opening the cover.

Handle the RTAB with care. Do not touch connectors with bare hands. Static discharges may damage the RTAB when it is removed from antistatic bag. Follow precautions noted on the bag.

Windows will detect the PCI RTAB as new hardware. Select Cancel at the add hardware display. The PAS System Services install will configure the system for the RTAB.

Page 207: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 18 800xA for MOD 300 PAS - System Services

3BSE034678R4101 207

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the following as appropriate:

– For MOD 300 Connectivity Servers select: ABB PAS - System Services and ABB MOD300 Connect.

– For all other nodes select: ABB MOD300 Connect.

5. Refer to PAS - System Services for MOD 300 Connectivity Server installations.

6. Refer to 800xA for MOD 300 Software (MOD 300 Connect) for all installations.

PAS - System Services

1. The InstallShield Wizard for ABB PAS System Services dialog appears, as shown in Figure 48.

TC05927A

Figure 48. Welcome Dialog for PAS System Services Software Setup Program

Page 208: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

800xA for MOD 300 Software (MOD 300 Connect) Section 18 800xA for MOD 300

208 3BSE034678R4101

2. Select MOD 300 Connection as the installation type and then click Install Now. This installs the MOD 300 Software and Drivers required for MOD 300.

3. The Installing ABB System Services dialog appears. During the installation, the RTAB device driver is installed. Wait for the installation status screen to complete.

– Click YES and continue if the Digital Signature not Found message is displayed

– Select NO If the System Settings Change restart message appears. This usually happens because of an uninstall/reinstall of PAS System Services. The reboot will be necessary later.

– Hardware Installation. Select Continue Anyway at the message (similar message for Windows Server 2003):

The software you are installing for this hardware: RTA Board PU510/PU511 has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows 2003.

4. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog appears. Click Finish to complete the installation.

This opens an information dialog asking if you want to restart. Select No (Do NOT restart at this time). A restart for configuration changes made by the PAS System Services software will be made later.

The windows installer now prepares for the 800xA for MOD 300 install.

800xA for MOD 300 Software (MOD 300 Connect)

The 800xA for MOD 300 installation adds the support files required for importing and using the MOD 300 interface. Some post installation activities are also required.

If you select Yes to restart, then you will have to run the MOD 300 installation wizard again and install MOD 300.

Page 209: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 18 800xA for MOD 300 800xA for MOD 300 Software (MOD 300 Connect)

3BSE034678R4101 209

1. The ABB MOD300 Setup dialog appears. The installer determines the correct installation type, as shown in Figure 49.

2. If the preselected installation type is correct (Client or Client/Connectivity Server), select Install Now. Client is preselected for all nodes types except when PAS System Services is present and then the MOD 300 Client/Server install is used.

3. To change the default destination folder, perform the following steps. Otherwise, skip to Step 4.

a. Alternately, select Next to continue past the welcome window (ABB MOD 300 Setup).

b. Read the license agreement. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and select Next to continue. Selecting the I do not accept option will not allow you to select Next.

c. Select Next to use the default destination folder or use the Change ... button to use another folder location. The default file path is:

C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT

d. Select the type of node 800xA for MOD 300 is being installed on and then select Next. The install process begins.

TC05925A

Figure 49. MOD 300 Setup Dialog

Page 210: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

800xA for MOD 300 Software (MOD 300 Connect) Section 18 800xA for MOD 300

210 3BSE034678R4101

4. The MOD 300 Server Security Setup dialog appears. Enter the domain\user name and password of the service account when requested, as shown in Figure 50 (password is case sensitive) and Select OK. Some registering occurs before the next step.

5. Select Finish to close the Setup program.

6. For Aspect and Connectivity Servers, select Yes to Restart Windows. This is required to have configuration changes take effect.

TC05926A

Figure 50. Security Login

Page 211: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 211

Section 19 PLC Connect

IntroductionThis section describes how to install the PLC Connect software.

Installation InstructionsIn a system, you have to install PLC Connect on all computers with an Aspect Server, Connectivity Server, Redundant Server, or Client.

1. Log on, with Administrator privileges, to a node with the 800xA System installed.

2. Exit all Windows programs.

3. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

4. Use Windows Explorer to locate Setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects1\PLC Connect

5. Double-click Setup.exe to begin the installation.

6. Follow the Installation Wizard. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Setup Type dialog: Select either:

– Typical. Typical installation with no options installed. Follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

– Custom. Allows available options to be selected for installation. Continue with Step b.

Click Change to change the installation path.

Page 212: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Instructions Section 19 PLC Connect

212 3BSE034678R4101

b. Custom Setup dialog: Specify which features to install. Make sure to specify that the features are to be installed on the local hard drive. Available features are:

– PLC Connect Basics. Follow the Wizard to complete the installation.– IEC60870. It requires a separate license. Continue with Step c.– Basic Process Objects. Obsolete process graphics for SB 2.1/2 Scada

Portal product. Do not use in new projects. Follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

c. IEC 60870 Licensing dialog: Enter the License ID for the IEC driver option, or the order number and then follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

Click Help for information on how to specify the features, Space for information on current disk space, or Change to change the installation path.

Page 213: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 213

Section 20 800xA for Safeguard

Introduction

This section will guide you through the installation procedures for 800xA for Safeguard. Windows Administrator privileges area required.

System ConfigurationTo integrate the System to the Safeguard controllers via the MB 300 network, the Real Time Accelerator Board (RTAB) interface board PU515 is required. This is a PCI with two redundant bus connectors. The RTA board shall be installed in the PC where the server software is residing (refer to Figure 51). The software on the RTA board is automatically loaded during initial server configuration and is always operative on system startup.

Before starting the installation, be sure to have:

• 800xA for Advant Master software installed.• RTA Board (PU515 PCI-type) installed in a Connectivity Server.

Table 38 lists the requirements necessary to run 800xA for Safeguard.

The current version of 800xA for Safeguard is Version 4.0. If 800xA for Safeguard Version 4.0 is currently installed on the system, do not proceed with further installation.

Table 38. Requirements

Hardware Workplace Requirements Server Requirements

PCI Slot --- 1 free slot

Disk 50 MB free space 50 MB free space

Page 214: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 20 800xA for Safeguard

214 3BSE034678R4101

Installation

To install the software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Setup.exe in the following directory:

Connects1\Safeguard Connect

3. Double-click Setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Custom Installation dialog: Click Next to proceed with the installation.

TC05931A

Figure 51. Control System with MB 300 Control Network Example

Click Disk Usage to see the amount of disk space required for the installation.

Page 215: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 215

Section 21 Engineering Studio

IntroductionThis section describes how to install Engineering Studio. Install this software on the Aspect Server and Engineering Workplaces. Figure 52 provides an overview of Engineering Studio.

Engineering Studio 4.1 consists of:

• A basic unit, named Engineering Platform• Three installable Options.• Two Professional Engineering Tools.

TC05751A

Figure 52. Engineering Studio Overview

Page 216: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Server/Client Installations Section 21 Engineering Studio

216 3BSE034678R4101

Engineering Platform 4.1 consists of:

• Engineering Base with Plant Explorer additions; this base component also defines the Engineering Workplace.

• Bulk Data Manager to handle bulk data with Microsoft Excel.• Document Manager to integrate documents.• Parameter Manager to handle central parameters.• AC 800MC Signal Extension for I/O Allocation with Bulk Data Manager.

The installable Options are:

• Function Designer 4.1.• Topology Designer 4.1.• Script Manager 4.1.

The Professional Engineering Tools are:

• Reuse Assistant 4.1.• Script Manager Professional 4.1.

Server/Client Installations

The Engineering Studio installation installs both the server and client components. There is not a separate installation for each component. You can configure the installed Engineering Studio software to run as either an Engineering Studio Workplace (a client), an Engineering Studio Server, or both.

Basic Installation Steps

1. Read the Release Notes for information concerning the specific release of the product.

The Engineering folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 contains the components of Engineering Studio. Other Engineering components such as Control Builder M, Graphics Builder, or Aspect Studio can be found in the System... folders.

The installation procedure for Script Manager and Script Manager Professional is exactly the same. Use of the Professional Functions of Script Manager requires a corresponding license at runtime.

Page 217: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 21 Engineering Studio Engineering Studio Dependencies

3BSE034678R4101 217

2. Set up a Windows account for the Engineering Studio users according to Users and Groups on page 78.

3. Install the Engineering Studio software according to Installation on page 218. Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

Engineering Studio Dependencies

The following dependencies between the different components of Engineering Studio exist:

• Engineering Platform - requires no other Engineering Studio component.

• Function Designer:

– Requires Document Manager which is included in a typical installation of Engineering Platform.

– Requires Control Builder Professional and AC 800M Connect to configure AC 800M controllers on Function diagrams.

– Requires Fieldbus Builder PROFIBUS/HART and HART Device Integration to configure HART devices on Function diagrams.

• Topology Designer:

– Requires Document Manager which is included in a typical installation of Engineering Platform.

– Requires Control Builder Professional and AC 800M Connect to view AC 800M control networks on Topology diagrams.

If the Engineering Studio System Extensions are loaded on the Aspect Server, then every client should have the related products installed (license can be used from every client); otherwise, there will be error messages and some functions (for example copying of objects with related aspects) will not work. The System Extensions of the Engineering Studio components are listed in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

An Engineering Workplace is only available on a client when Engineering Platform is installed and the System Extension Engineering Base has been created on this client.

Page 218: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Installation Section 21 Engineering Studio

218 3BSE034678R4101

Installation

To install the Engineering Studio software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

Engineering

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the check boxes for the products to install (refer to Table 23 on page 50).

b. Confirm Selection dialog: Click Next to continue or Back to change the selections. The selected products will be installed one after the other. Refer to the following sections for the installation of the individual products.

– Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine on page 218.– Topology Designer on page 221.– Function Designer on page 222.– Reuse Assistant on page 223.– Script Manager on page 223.

Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine

If Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine was selected, the following message appears in a dialog and is displayed until installation is complete:

Please wait while Windows configures Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine.

If intending to install Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine - which is required for Document Manager and Parameter Manager - double-click msxml2.msi in the Engineering\MDAC hotfix Q823490 folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 before starting setup.exe from the Engineering folder.

The version numbers shown in some figures in this section are examples and may not correspond to the current version. All other information in the figures is current.

Page 219: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 21 Engineering Studio Engineering Platform

3BSE034678R4101 219

After installation of Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine is finished, the next setup in the product selection dialog is automatically started.

Engineering Platform

If Engineering Platform was selected, the Engineering Platform Setup dialog will appear. To install Engineering Platform:

1. Follow the Installation Wizard. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Installation Type dialog:

– To change the default installation path, click Browse and select another destination directory. If a drive letter only is selected (for example D:\), the software will be installed in the D:\Engineering directory.

– The default selection is Typical. This installs all required software components and is recommended. If this is the desired selection, follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

– To define some parts of the installation yourself, select Custom, click Next, and continue with Step b.

b. Change Feature Dialog (Figure 53) Use the Change Feature dialog to:

TC05759A

Figure 53. Change Feature Dialog (Engineering Platform)

Page 220: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Engineering Platform Section 21 Engineering Studio

220 3BSE034678R4101

– Specify the components to install. To reset the selection of components to install to the default selection, click Reset.

– Click Disk Usage to see the amount of disk space required for the installation.

– Select how to install the components from the context menu for each feature in the list.

– Expand the sub features of a feature by clicking on the plus sign to the left.

– Select, by clicking on the arrow, either:

Will be installed on local hard drive

-or-

Entire feature will be installed on local hard drive

The difference is that the second alternative also installs all subfeatures.

2. The Engineering Studio software has now been successfully installed. The following shortcuts are created:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > Engineering > Bulk Data Manager

The selections Run (all) from Network and Installed on First Use are not applicable.

The Engineering Platform installation requires a reboot of the computer. If desired, postpone this until all Engineering Studio products have been installed.

In the created system the Plant object and the Area objects in the Functional Structure are examples and can be deleted or renamed as desired.

Page 221: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 21 Engineering Studio Topology Designer

3BSE034678R4101 221

Topology Designer

If Topology Designer was selected, the Topology Designer Setup dialog appears.

1. Follow the Installation Wizard. The rest of this installation procedure is the same as for Engineering Platform on page 219, with the exception of the change feature dialog which has different features to select as shown in Figure 54.

TC05771A

Figure 54. Change Feature Dialog (Topology Designer)

Page 222: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Function Designer Section 21 Engineering Studio

222 3BSE034678R4101

Function Designer

If Function Designer was selected, the Function Designer Setup dialog appears.

1. Follow the Installation Wizard. The rest of this installation procedure is the same as for Engineering Platform on page 219, with the exception of the change feature dialog which has different features to select as shown in Figure 55.

TC05764A

Figure 55. Change Feature Dialog (Function Designer)

Page 223: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 21 Engineering Studio Reuse Assistant

3BSE034678R4101 223

Reuse Assistant

If Reuse Assistant was selected, the Reuse Assistant Setup dialog appears.

1. Follow the Installation Wizard. The rest of this installation procedure is the same as for Engineering Platform on page 219, with the exception of the change feature dialog which has different features to select as shown in Figure 56.

Script Manager

If you have chosen to install Script Manager, the Script Manager Setup dialog appears.

1. Follow the Installation Wizard. The rest of this installation procedure is the same as for Engineering Platform on page 219, with the exception of the

Figure 56. Change Feature Dialog (Reuse Assistant)

Page 224: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Additional Configuration Section 21 Engineering Studio

224 3BSE034678R4101

change feature dialog which has different features to select as shown in Figure 57.

Additional ConfigurationThere are two additional configuration steps required before using Engineering Studio:

• Download and Install Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine Security Patch.• Document Manager - AutoCAD Integration.

TC05769A

Figure 57. Change Feature Dialog (Script Manager)

The Change Feature Dialog for Script Manager is available for compatibility reasons. Select either to install or not to install Script Manager. The installation of Script Manager always installs the Professional version, which includes the nonProfessional version. The use of the Professional features depends on the availability of the corresponding license at runtime.

Page 225: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 21 Engineering StudioDownload and Install Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine Security

3BSE034678R4101 225

Download and Install Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine Security Patch

Microsoft SQL Server Patch MS03-031 (815495) must be installed if Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine is installed.

1. Go to the following Microsoft web site:

http://www.microsoft.com/technet/security/bulletin/ms03-031.mspx

2. Expand (click on the + sign) the Patch Availability topic under General Information.

3. Click the:

Microsoft SQL 2000 32-bit Edition

link to launch the SQL Server 2000 (32-bit) Security Patch MS03-031 web site.

4. Follow the instructions on that web site to download and install the patch, making sure to select the following:

– In the Instance to Update dialog, select:

<server name>\EBInstance

– In the Authentication Mode dialog, select:

Windows Authentication

Document Manager - AutoCAD Integration

For AutoCAD Integration in Document Manager one of the following is required:

• AutoCAD 2000i or AutoCAD 2002

• Autodesk VoloView Express 2.01 or later is recommended to be used for viewing of AutoCAD files. VoloView Express is available on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 in the following directory:

System1\Software\AutoDesk

as a self installable exe

-file.

Page 226: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Required Licenses Section 21 Engineering Studio

226 3BSE034678R4101

Required LicensesThe following licenses are required by the various Engineering Studio components:

• Engineering Workplace License: Engineering Platform, Function Designer, and Topology Designer.

• Reuse Assistant License: Reuse Assistant.

• Script Manager Professional License: Script Manager Professional.

What to do Next• Control Builder M must be installed (if not already done) in order to use it

integrated with Process Portal A and Plant Explorer.

• If the reboot after installation of Engineering Platform was postponed, be sure to reboot the computer now.

Page 227: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 227

Section 22 Asset Optimization

IntroductionThis section provides procedures for:

• Asset Optimization. Install the AO Server on the Asset Optimization Application Server nodes, and the Asset Optimization Client on all other 800xA client nodes (Asset Optimization Workplaces). Refer to Asset Optimization Software on page 233 to install Asset Optimization.

If Maximo Integration is required, refer to:

– Defining the System Environment for Maximo Integration on page 228.– Accessing Maximo Server Versions 4.1 and 4.1.1 on page 230.– Accessing Maximo Server Version 5.1 on page 232.

The setups described in those procedures must be performed before installing Asset Optimization.

• PC, Network and Software Monitoring. Install this on any 800xA System node that requires this functionality. Refer to PC, Network and Software Monitoring on page 234.

Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

PrerequisitesBefore installing Asset Optimization software, install the following prerequisites, if required:

• Components from MRO Software (if Maximo Integration is selected):– Maximo SDK for Business Components (version compatible with

Maximo Server version) for installation on Asset Optimization

Page 228: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Defining the System Environment for Maximo Integration Section 22 Asset Optimization

228 3BSE034678R4101

Application Server node. Refer to Defining the System Environment for Maximo Integration on page 228 for more information.

– Maximo Server version 4.1, 4.1.1, or 5.1 (on a separate, non-800xA node that can be accessed by the 800xA System).

• Components from Meriam Process Technologies (if DMS Calibration Integration is selected):– DMS Server software for installation on Asset Optimization Application

Server node.

– DMS Client software for installation on all other nodes where the DMS Calibration Integration system extension is registered, except the Domain Server node.

• Components from SAP (if SAP/PM Integration is selected):– SAP/PM version 4.7 (on a separate, non-800xA node that can be accessed

by the 800xA System).

Defining the System Environment for Maximo IntegrationPerform this procedure only if you are using Maximo Integration functionality.

Before installing the Maximo Integration system extension, it is important to obtain information about the system environment in which it will operate. Reviewing the following points will help formulate a solid installation and configuration strategy.

Refer to MRO installation instructions for detailed MRO software requirements and installation instructions.

MSDE must be installed on the Asset Optimization Application Server node if the DMS Server is installed.

Refer to DMS installation instructions for detailed DMS software requirements and installation instructions.

Refer to SAP/PM installation instructions for detailed SAP/PM software requirements and installation instructions.

Page 229: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 22 Asset Optimization Network Topology

3BSE034678R4101 229

Network Topology

Record the following information for use during installation and/or configuration:

• Obtain the name of the Asset Optimization Application Server node on which to install Maximo SDK for Business Components.

• Gather Maximo Server information including:– Maximo Server node hostname/address.– SID.– Database name.– Connection user name and password.

• Identify network security devices (e.g. firewalls) that may isolate the Maximo Server node from the Asset Optimization Application Server node. If present, these devices need to support the network protocol used by the Maximo Integration system extension.

System Security

Record the following information for use during installation and/or configuration:

• Define a set of Windows users that are granted access to the Industrial IT system product and its Maximo Integration system extension aspects.

• Define a corresponding set of user accounts in the Maximo Server node with the appropriate privileges: e.g. some users may only view active work orders while others are authorized to submit new ones.

• Define the Industrial IT user to Maximo user mapping. This mapping is implemented by adding one Maximo Credentials aspect in the Industrial IT User object (refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - Asset Optimization, Configuration).

This node must be configured to be the AoWebServerNode. Refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup for more information.

Maximo SDK for Business Components uses a Java Remote Method Invocation (RMI) connection that typically uses TCP/IP ports 1099 and 80.

Page 230: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Systems Configuration Section 22 Asset Optimization

230 3BSE034678R4101

Systems Configuration

Record the following information for use during installation and/or configuration.

• Define a strategy to model the assets into Industrial IT objects.

• Obtain the Maximo objects to Industrial IT objects mapping.

The Maximo Integration system extension links the equipment objects defined in the Maximo database to aspect integration objects in the Asset Optimization structures.

Because of the different purpose of such systems it is not always possible to configure a one-to-one mapping between a Maximo object and its Industrial IT counterpart. However, if needed, one Industrial IT object can be mapped to more than one Maximo object (pieces of equipment) and vice versa.

It is recommended to model the Industrial IT system configuration (e.g. in the Functional Structure) with sufficient object granularity to optimize the usability of the integrated system. This requires careful engineering of the object types representing the asset in the system.

Accessing Maximo Server Versions 4.1 and 4.1.1The following configuration steps are necessary in order to access the Maximo Server Version 4.1 and 4.1.1 using the Maximo SDK for Business Components Version 4.1 and 4.1.1. The recommended method is to copy three folders from the Maximo Server directory (MXServer) to the hard disk of the Asset Optimization Application Server node. This approach does not require any special privileges on the Maximo Server node.

1. Install Maximo SDK for Business Components Version 4.1 or 4.1.1 on the Asset Optimization Application Server node.

2. Map a network drive from the Asset Optimization Application Server node to the Maximo Server node.

3. Navigate to the MXServer directory on the Maximo Server node and copy the following folders: JRE, PSDI, and Resources from the Maximo Server to the AO Server Node under the SDK install directory (usually Install Drive:\Maximo).

Page 231: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 22 Asset Optimization Accessing Maximo Server Versions 4.1 and 4.1.1

3BSE034678R4101 231

4. Select: Start > Run to open the Run dialog.

5. Enter regedit in the Run dialog and click OK to open the Registry Editor.

6. Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Java VM and double-click on the Classpath key as shown in Figure 58. This opens the Edit String dialog.

7. Edit (if needed) the Classpath string as follows:

Drive:\Copied from mro-server\MxInstallDir;%systemroot%\java\classes\Workord.jar;%systemroot%\java\classes\jndi.jar;%systemroot%\java\classes\swingall.jar;%systemroot%\java\classes\rmi.zip;.;%systemroot%\java\classes;

where Drive:\Copied from mro-server\MxInstallDir is the location where the JRE, PSDI, and Resources folders were copied (usually Install Drive:\Maximo).

8. Click OK when completed.

9. Disconnect the network drive.

TC04868A

Figure 58. Registry Editor

Page 232: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Accessing Maximo Server Version 5.1 Section 22 Asset Optimization

232 3BSE034678R4101

Accessing Maximo Server Version 5.1The following configuration steps are necessary in order to access the Maximo Server Version 5.1 using the Maximo SDK for Business Components Version 5.1.

The recommended method is to copy three folders from the Maximo Server directory (MXServer) to the hard disk of the Asset Optimization Application Server node. This approach does not require any special privileges on the Maximo Server node.

1. Install Maximo SDK for Business Components Version 5.1 on the Asset Optimization Application Server node.

2. Map a network drive from the Asset Optimization Application Server node to the Maximo Server node:

a. Open Windows Explorer.

b. Select:

Tools > Map Network Drive

to access the Map Network Drive dialog.

c. Click Browse and browse to the drive on the Maximo server node that has the Maximo directory and map this drive location to provide access for copying several directories in Step 3.

d. Click Connect using a different user name to access the Connect As dialog.

e. Fill in the User name and Password fields with the appropriate information and click OK.

f. Click Finish.

3. Navigate to the MXServer directory on the Maximo Server node and copy the following folders: JRE, PSDI, and Resources.

4. Navigate to C:\Maximo (this assumes Maximo SDK for Business Components Version 5.1 was installed in this location) on the Asset Optimization Application Server node and paste the folders copied in Step 3 to this location.

There may be difficulties connecting to the Maximo server and accessing CMMS Views due to the Java VM version installed with the Maximo SDK. Contact MRO Software for information on resolving any related problems.

Page 233: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 22 Asset Optimization Asset Optimization Software

3BSE034678R4101 233

5. Disconnect the network drive.

Asset Optimization SoftwareThis procedure describes installation of the Asset Optimization software. There are two choices when installing the software: AO Server and Asset Optimization Client. First, install the AO Server on the Asset Optimization Application Server node, and then install the Asset Optimization Client on all other connected 800xA System nodes, except for the Domain Server node.

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

AssetOpt\Asset Optimization

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Setup Type dialog: Make the selection based on the following:

– Select Server to install AO Server components on the Asset Optimization Application Server node.

– Select Client to install Asset Optimization files on an 800xA Client node.

Access to the Maximo Web pages, via links in the 800xA System Maximo views from Asset Optimization Clients and directly from Microsoft Internet Explorer, requires that a recently released (version 1.4.2-08 or later) Sun Microsystems Java VM is installed on the client node. Maximo web pages are dependent on objects and properties that are supported in the newer versions of the Java VM and not in the version bundled with Maximo SDK for Business Components.

The system extensions are loaded only one time on the Aspect Server node using the Configuration Wizard.

If performing this procedure as part of an upgrade, and a previous version of Asset Optimization has not been uninstalled, the following message will appear and the installation will abort.

Uninstall previous version of Asset Optimization before proceeding with this install.

Page 234: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

PC, Network and Software Monitoring Section 22 Asset Optimization

234 3BSE034678R4101

PC, Network and Software MonitoringThis section describes how to install the PC, Network and Software Monitoring software.

The PC, Network and Software Monitoring software can independently monitor the status of Information Technology (IT) Assets. By default, IT Asset status is viewable via the 800xA System Status Viewer, or through the standard faceplates provided with each of the predefined IT Asset types. When used in conjunction with Asset Optimization alarms can be generated based on error conditions, and IT Asset status are viewed via the Asset Viewer and Asset Reporter.

PC, Network and Software Monitoring Software

The PC, Network and Software Monitoring software should be installed on each 800xA node in your system.

When PC, Network and Software Monitoring is installed, additional components are provided:

• Network and Device Scanning Tool.• Network Monitoring.

These can also be installed independently of PC, Network and Software Monitoring (refer to Independent Component Installation on page 236).

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate setup.exe in the following directory:

AssetOpt\PC, Network and Software Monitoring

Use the Installing User account to install the software (Users and Groups on page 78).

SNMP Services MUST be enabled BEFORE installing the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server software. Refer to Enable SNMP Service on page 88.

Do not halt the installation process part way through a step; however, it is possible to halt the installation process between steps.

Unless otherwise instructed, restart the computer when prompted.

Page 235: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 22 Asset Optimization PC, Network and Software Monitoring Software

3BSE034678R4101 235

3. Double-click setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Welcome dialog: Select the PC, Network and Software Monitoring check box.

b. Select an Installation Type dialog: Refer to Table 39 to select the setup type. Then refer to the appropriate subsection listed in the Reference column in Table 39.

Complete Installation

Selecting Complete installs the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server, aspects and system extension components.

1. Select Complete in the Select an Installation Type dialog.

Table 39. PC, Network and Software Monitoring Setup Types

Setup Type Software Description Reference

Complete Installs PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server, aspects, system extension components, the Device Scanning Tool, and Network Monitor on PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server and/or single engineering node. The single engineering node type includes the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server and Client.

Complete Installation on page 235

Typical Client workstation - Install on all workstations except where a Complete installation has been performed.

Typical Installation on page 236

During installation, a dialog may occasionally appear to blink as multiple command windows are opened and closed. This is normal behavior. Do not manually close any command windows or the installation could be interrupted.

Page 236: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Independent Component Installation Section 22 Asset Optimization

236 3BSE034678R4101

a. Set OPC Server User Account dialog (Figure 59): Enter the user name and password that the OPC Server will run under. This is the same administrative account that was used as the 800xA Service User. Make sure to prefix the user name with the domain name (domain\user) if specifying an account on a domain.

2. Restart the computer.

Typical Installation

Selecting Typical installs the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Client components.

1. Select Typical in the Select an Installation Type dialog.

2. Follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

3. Restart the computer.

Independent Component InstallationTwo PC, Network and Software components can be installed independently onto a node other than one that has the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Complete install:

• Network and Device Scanning Tool on page 237.• Network Monitor on page 237.

TC05341A

Figure 59. Set OPC Server User Account Dialog

Page 237: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 22 Asset Optimization Network and Device Scanning Tool

3BSE034678R4101 237

Network and Device Scanning Tool

To load the Network and Device Scanning Tool onto a node other than the one that has the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Complete install:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Setup.exe in the following directory:

AssetOpt\PC, Network and Software Monitoring\Network and Device Scanning Tool

3. Double-click Setup.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

Network Monitor

Before installing the Network Monitor, it is a good idea to take some site planning considerations into account.

Site Planning

In order to monitor traffic on an Ethernet based network, some up-front planning is generally required. The purpose of the planning is to ensure that all network traffic to be monitored goes past the computers that are doing the monitoring. The design of the Network Monitoring system allows it to monitor traffic on a network segment, traffic for a given node, or traffic between nodes. In order to do this correctly, all the traffic for the given situation must also flow past the computer hosting the Network Monitor Server.

Switches and Hubs

The nature of an Ethernet based network is such that in many cases not all traffic will flow past a specific node on the network. This is especially true in a switched network environment where the switches are smart enough to only send traffic to nodes that need the traffic.

In situations where smart switches are being used, these switches generally have the capacity to send all traffic passing through the switch to a single switch port for network analysis purposes. For instance, many Cisco Systems switches support a SPAN (Switched Packet Analyzer) mode which allows this function to occur. Of course, the computer that is performing the network monitoring would be connected to this port.

Page 238: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Network Monitor Section 22 Asset Optimization

238 3BSE034678R4101

As can be seen in Figure 60, the network monitor computer C will see all traffic travelling on the segment for cases 2 and 3.

Case 2 has the SPAN function enabled on the switch and thus computer C will see the traffic travelling from A to B, even though it is not destined for C (assuming that the SPAN’d port on the switch is the one that computer C is connected to).

Case 3 shows a Hub, which always sends all traffic to all computers, irrespective of requested destination.

Case 1 shows a ‘smart’ switch with the SPAN disabled. Any traffic between A and B will only flow on the wires connecting A and B to the switch. This is done by design within the switch’s circuitry. Computer C will never see the traffic between A and B.

Installation

To load the Network Monitor onto a node other than the one that has the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Complete install:

Figure 60. Network Traffic Destinations

There are no new menu items created by this install. There is only a new process running on the computer.

Page 239: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 22 Asset Optimization Network Monitor

3BSE034678R4101 239

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Setup.exe in the following directory:

AssetOpt\PC, Network and Software Monitoring\Network Monitor

3. Double-click Setup.exe to begin the installation.

Page 240: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Network Monitor Section 22 Asset Optimization

240 3BSE034678R4101

Page 241: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 241

Section 23 Production Management

IntroductionThis section describes how to install Production Management functionality. The Batch Management and Manufacturing Management software make up this functionality.

Batch Management InstallationBatch Management is a client/server application within the 800xA System. Install the Batch Server on the Batch Management Application Server. If applicable, install the Batch Management Secondary Server on another Batch Management Application Server after the installation of the Batch Management Primary Server.

Install the Batch Client on all other nodes in the 800xA System (i.e. Aspect Servers, Connectivity Servers, other Application Servers, and Workplace Clients).

Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

Use this procedure to install Batch Servers (Primary and if applicable, Secondary), and Batch Clients. Any differences in the procedures will be noted.

A Batch Client is automatically installed on all Batch Servers.

Install Batch Clients on all nodes in the 800xA System other than the Primary and Secondary Batch Server nodes.

The Primary Aspect Server of the system must contain a Batch Client.

Page 242: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Batch Management Installation Section 23 Production Management

242 3BSE034678R4101

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Launch.exe in the following directory:

ProdMgmt\Batch Management

3. Double-click Launch.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

a. Installation Products dialog: Click the product type (Primary Server, Secondary Server, or Client) to be installed. Table 40 describes the options and when each should be used.

b. Installation Type dialogs (Batch Management Environment and Batch Management):

– Select the type of installation desired (Typical is the recommended type).

– Use Browse to select the installation location, or accept the default.

c. Batch Management Runtime Database Drive Selection dialog (Server installations only): Select the disk drive (partition) that will contain the Batch Runtime database.

Table 40. Setup Type Options

Option Requirements

Primary Server Install on one workstation. This server manages the Secondary Server and all Batch Clients.

Secondary Server (optional)

Install on one node. This server will take over if the Primary Server fails.

Client Install on all other nodes in the 800xA System including the 800xA Primary Aspect Server.

The installation location for Batch Management Environment and for Batch Management must be the same.

Page 243: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 23 Production Management Manufacturing Management

3BSE034678R4101 243

Manufacturing ManagementThree types of installations are possible:

• Application Server Installation on page 244.• Client Installation on page 245.• IForm Developer on page 245.

Installation instructions are provided for all three options. All three types of installation share certain common steps (refer to Common Installation Steps on page 243). Begin the installation by performing the common steps. When all the common steps are complete, proceed to the installation-specific procedures required.

Common Installation Steps

The following steps must be performed prior to installing any Manufacturing Management software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Manufacturing Management.exe in the following directory:

ProdMgmt\Manufacturing Management

3. Double-click Manufacturing Management.exe to begin the installation.

4. Follow the Installation Wizard to complete the installation. Perform the following when the indicated dialogs appear:

5. 800xA Manufacturing Management Setup Information Requirement dialog: Enter the full node name of the MM Server node. This can be found on the Network Identification tab in the System Properties dialog (right click the My Computer icon).

– Enter the name of the node on which this software is being installed if it is a MM Server installation or IForm Developer installation.

– Enter the name of the MM Server node if it is a client-only installation and click Next. The ABB Manufacturing Management Setup Select Features dialog will be displayed.

6. Proceed to the appropriate installation-specific procedures.

Page 244: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Application Server Installation Section 23 Production Management

244 3BSE034678R4101

Application Server Installation

The MM Server normally consists of a Web Server and a SQL Server database. Every 800xA Manufacturing Management System must have at least one MM Server installed. Multiple MM Servers are supported when required by the anticipated workload. When multiple MM Servers are used, it is recommended that a dedicated, separate Database Server be included in the system architecture. All MM Servers would point to the single Database Server, Redundant database configurations are supported.

To install the MM Server:

1. Select both the Web Server and Client options in the ABB Manufacturing Management Select Features dialog (Figure 61) and follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

The MM Client must be installed on all MM Servers.

During installation, a dialog may occasionally appear to blink as multiple command windows are opened and closed. This is normal behavior. Also normal is a window staying open for a couple minutes at the end of the installation. Do not manually close any command windows or the installation could be interrupted.

TC05691A

Figure 61. Select Features Dialog (Web Server)

Page 245: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 23 Production Management Client Installation

3BSE034678R4101 245

2. Proceed to the Application Server post installation procedures in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

Client Installation

The client installation consists of the client components of a Manufacturing Management installation. All client-side functions are available except for IForm development. Install a client on every node that will execute Manufacturing Management functions.

To install the MM Client:

1. Select the Client option in the ABB Manufacturing Management Select Features dialog and follow the Wizard to complete the installation.

2. Proceed to the client post installation procedures in Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

IForm Developer

The IForm Developer node is used for the engineering of Intelligent Forms (IForms) and other configuration functions. The IForm Developer node requires Microsoft FrontPage 2003 to be installed locally. Install Microsoft FrontPage 2003 on every node to be used to develop Manufacturing Management IForms.

During installation, a dialog may occasionally appear to blink as multiple command windows are opened and closed. This is normal behavior. Do not manually close any command windows or the installation could be interrupted.

Page 246: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

IForm Developer Section 23 Production Management

246 3BSE034678R4101

Page 247: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 247

Section 24 Information Management

IntroductionThis section describes how to install the Information Management (IM) software for the 800xA System Version 4.1. Information Management is a client/server application. Four configurations provide four different levels of functionality:

• The IM Server runs services for historical data collection, archive, and open data access. Install this on the IM Server node. Refer to IM Server on page 248.

• The Information Management Consolidation node allows for consolidation of historical data from IM Servers in other systems on one node. Software installation is the same as for the IM Server. Refer to IM Server on page 248. The only difference is that the consolidation node is set up as a single-node system which may or may not reside in a domain.

• The Information Management Client Toolkit supports a user interface for configuring and managing aspect objects related to Information Management without having to install the full IM Server. Install the Client Toolkit on all non-Information Management nodes in your system (i.e. Aspect Servers, Connectivity Servers, other Application Servers, and Workplace Clients). Refer to Client Toolkit on page 256.

• Information Management Desktop Tools provide access to process and event data on the IM Server. For example, DataDirect is a tool for integrating process and event information from your applications into an Excel spreadsheet. Other tools that support data access are Desktop Trends and Display Services. With the proper authority historical and real-time process data can be updated via DataDirect and Display Services. The Desktop Tools are automatically installed locally on the IM Server node. They may also be installed on remote clients. The remote clients do not require 800xA System software to be installed. Refer to Desktop Tools on page 258.

Page 248: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

IM Server Section 24 Information Management

248 3BSE034678R4101

IM ServerThis section describes how to install the IM Server software.

The installation wizard installs all Information Management software on the system drive. Install the Oracle program files on the system drive as well (recommended). If desired, designate different drives for storing Oracle data files, and file-based numeric log data.

Default user accounts are created when Information Management and required third party software is installed. To add, remove, or otherwise edit any user accounts after installation, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - Information Management, Configuration. Certain Windows and Oracle users installed with the system should have their default passwords changed in order to prevent unauthorized access. For details, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - Information Management, Configuration.

Preparation

The following steps are required to ready the computer for Information Management software. Detailed instructions are provided in the following sections.

• Make sure to have the required hardware and enough free disk space.

• Install this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

• Make a backup of the system before installing Information Management software.

• Exit all Windows applications.

The IM Server requires Microsoft Message Queuing Services. If the computer does not have Microsoft Message Queuing Services, install it now. The procedure differs depending on the operating system.

The Microsoft Message Queuing Services and Oracle® 9 server software are required for the IM Server. Instructions for installing these prerequisites are provided in this section.

Page 249: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Preparation

3BSE034678R4101 249

Microsoft Message Queuing Services (MSMQ) - Windows Server 2003

To install Microsoft Message Queuing Services when using Windows Server 2003:

1. Launch the Add/Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel.

2. Click Add/Remove Windows Components.

3. Select Application Server and click Details.

4. In the Application Server Details dialog, select Message Queuing and click OK.

5. Click Next to start installing the message queuing services.

6. Click Finish when the installation is complete.

Microsoft Message Queuing Services (MSMQ) - Windows 2000 Server

To install Microsoft Message Queuing Services for Windows 2000 Server:

1. Launch the Add/Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel.

2. Click Add/Remove Windows Components.

3. Scroll to and select the Message Queuing Services (if not already selected).

4. Click Next to start installing the message queuing services. This may prompt for the Windows installation CD. If prompted, insert the Windows installation CD and click OK.

5. Select Message Queuing Server and click Next.

6. In the next dialog, select Message Queuing will not access a directory service and click Next.

7. Click Finish when the installation is complete.

This is a good time to verify that IIS is installed. Refer to Internet Information Services on page 69.

This is a good time to verify that IIS is installed. Refer to Internet Information Services on page 69.

Page 250: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Oracle Section 24 Information Management

250 3BSE034678R4101

Oracle

Oracle 9 server software is required for the Information Management historical services.

Oracle 8 Client software is required if the IM Server (Version 4.1) will interact with History Services on a Unix-based Enterprise Historian 2.2/n server. This is because Enterprise Historian is based on Oracle 7, and Oracle 9 can not communicate directly with Oracle 7.

Oracle 8 Client

The installer for the Oracle 8 Client is provided on the 800xA installation media in the InfoMgmt2 folder under Oracle8.

To install Oracle 8 Client software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 2 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate OracleInstaller.exe in the following directory:

InfoMgmt2\Oracle8

3. Double-click OracleInstaller.exe to begin the installation. This starts the Oracle installer.

– The Oracle software installation is organized into three steps. Step 1 installs the Oracle 8 Client, while steps 2 and 3 install the Oracle patches.

4. Verify that the Oracle Client option is selected and click Step 1 to start the Oracle installation. This displays the Available Product Components dialog.

5. Click Next to accept the default selections and continue. This displays the Install Progress display. When the installation is finished, the Oracle Installer will indicate the Oracle 8 Client has been installed.

If the IM Server (Version 4.1) will interact with History Services on a Unix-based Enterprise Historian 2.2/n server, then the Oracle 8 Client must be installed before Oracle 9. The Oracle 8 Client can not be installed after Oracle 9. Therefore, if there is any intention of using the Oracle 8 Client, install it before Oracle 9.

Page 251: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Oracle

3BSE034678R4101 251

6. Install the first patch by clicking Step 2. The installation will run to completion without requiring any further input, and the installer will indicate that the patch has been installed.

7. Install the second patch by clicking Step 3. The installation will run to completion without requiring any further input, and the installer will indicate that the patch has been installed.

8. Click OK when the installer indicates that all three steps have been successfully completed.

Oracle 9

The Oracle 9 software is provided in the InfoMgmt2 directory on 800xA System Installation DVD 2.

Deleting the Local Environmental Variable (if Present). If the LOCAL environment variable is present the Oracle installation will fail. To check to see if it is present, and delete it if it is:

1. Launch Windows Control Panel.

2. Double-click System to open the System Properties dialog.

3. Click the Advanced tab.

4. Click Environmental Variables.

5. Look for the LOCAL variable in the System Variables list.

6. If it is present, select it and click Delete.

The History Database Instance Wizard will not allow installation of data files on non-NTFS partitions. When the Windows operating system was installed, if the NTFS file system was not selected for partitions that will hold the History database, convert those partitions to NTFS before installing Oracle.

Make sure the LOCAL environment variable is NOT present. This variable will cause the Oracle installation to fail. To verify, refer to Deleting the Local Environmental Variable (if Present).

Page 252: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Oracle Section 24 Information Management

252 3BSE034678R4101

Oracle 9 Server Installation. To install Oracle 9 server software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 2 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate autorun.bat in the following directory:

InfoMgmt2

3. Double-click autorun.bat to begin the installation. This starts the Oracle installer.

– The Oracle software installation is organized into two steps. Step 1 installs the Oracle server, while step 2 installs the Oracle patch.

– The default settings are set appropriately for a fresh installation of the Oracle software. The Custom and Advanced View options are provided to support applications where an earlier version of the Oracle software is already installed. These features are generally not required, and should not be selected.

4. Verify that the Oracle Server option is selected and click Step 1 to start the Oracle installation. This launches the Oracle Universal Installer which is displayed briefly, followed by the expanded Install Status display, figure Figure 62.

5. Progress will be indicated by a progress bar on the Oracle installation wizard.

Let the process run to completion. After a few minutes, the Next button will become active. DO NOT click Next. Let the installation proceed automatically.

6. The Configuration Tools dialog will be displayed, and the Net Configuration Assistant will be displayed over the Configuration Tools dialog.

The progress bar may appear to be stuck on the 100% mark for a while. The changing messages above the progress bar are an indication that the installation is proceeding.

If the Net Configuration Assistant is not displayed, the installation has stalled. To fix the problem, refer to Verifying Oracle Service Names under Troubleshooting Install Errors in the Information Management section of Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup.

Page 253: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Oracle

3BSE034678R4101 253

7. When the Oracle Net Configuration Assistant is displayed, select the option to

Perform typical configuration and click Next to continue. When the Oracle Net Configuration is complete the Oracle Universal Installer will exit automatically.

8. The Installer will now show that Step 1 has been completed (9.2.0 Server Installed).

9. Click Step 2 to install the Oracle patch. This stops any Oracle services that may be running. The installation will run to completion without any further intervention. The ABB Oracle Installer dialog will then indicate that step 2 is complete.

10. Click OK to exit.

Figure 62. Oracle Installer

Page 254: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Information Management Server Installation Section 24 Information Management

254 3BSE034678R4101

Information Management Server Installation

The Information Management software is installed via the Information Management Installation Wizard. To install the IM Server software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Launch.exe in the following directory:

InfoMgmt1\Autorun

3. Double-click Launch.exe to begin the installation.

4. The Information Management Installation Wizard appears. Click Information Management.

5. The Information Management Prerequisites dialog for IM Server installations appears as shown in Figure 63.

Figure 63. Information Management Prerequisites Dialog for IM Server

Page 255: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Information Management Server Installation

3BSE034678R4101 255

– The Wizard scans the computer to verify that all prerequisites are installed. For installed prerequisites, the wizard indicates the version number. If the version is not current enough to meet the requirements of this installation, the version number is indicated in red; otherwise the version number is indicated in black.

– Prerequisites that are not installed are indicated as Not Found. These must be installed. Prerequisites that are installed, but are out-of-date (indicated in red), must have the proper version installed.

– If all 800xA System installation instructions have been followed, all prerequisites should already be installed. If not, use the links on the Information Management Prerequisites dialog to install them now. When all prerequisites are installed, the Continue function on the Information Management Prerequisites dialog is enabled.

6. Click Continue to continue installing the Information Management software. This displays the Information Management Install dialog (Figure 64).

Figure 64. Information Management Install Dialog for IM Server

Only components for which licenses have been purchased and installed can be used. All options are selected by default.

Page 256: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Client Toolkit Section 24 Information Management

256 3BSE034678R4101

7. Click INSTALL Information Management and Selected Options. This begins the Information Management software installation that installs all Information Management components, including the selected options from start to finish without any further intervention. This process will take about 10 minutes. The time may vary slightly depending on the performance of the computer.

– The Wizard indicates the component that is currently being installed.

– When the installation is finished, the installed software version is indicated for each component.

8. Click Exit and a Restart Windows prompt appears. Click Restart Now to restart the computer and complete the installation.

Client ToolkitThe Information Management Client Toolkit supports a remote user interface for configuring Information Management services and managing aspect objects from the Plant Explorer Workplace, without having the full server functionality installed. Install the Client Toolkit on all non-Information Management nodes in the system (i.e. Aspect and Connectivity Servers, and Operator Workplace Clients). This will allow for browsing and configuring Information Management objects and aspects from these nodes.

The Client Toolkit may also be installed on remote clients (without 800xA System software) to support Open Data Access for third party desktop applications.

Install this software as the 800xA Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78. To install this software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Launch.exe in the following directory:

InfoMgmt1\Autorun

3. Double-click Launch.exe to begin the installation.

The SoftPoint Server must be installed before installing the Client Toolkit. Refer to SoftPoint Server on page 123.

Page 257: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Client Toolkit

3BSE034678R4101 257

4. The Information Management Installation Wizard appears. Click Client Toolkit.

5. The Information Management Prerequisites dialog for Client Toolkit installations appears as shown in Figure 65.

– The Wizard scans the computer to verify that all prerequisites are installed. For installed prerequisites, the wizard indicates the version number. If the version is not current enough to meet the requirements of this installation, the version number is indicated in red; otherwise the version number is indicated in black.

– Prerequisites that are not installed are indicated as Not Found. These must be installed. Prerequisites that are installed, but are out-of-date (indicated in red), must have the proper version installed.

– If all 800xA System installation instructions have been followed, all prerequisites should already be installed. If not, use the links on the Information Management Prerequisites dialog to install them now. When all prerequisites are installed, the Continue function on the Information Management Prerequisites dialog is enabled.

Figure 65. Information Management Prerequisites Dialog for Client Toolkit

Page 258: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Desktop Tools Section 24 Information Management

258 3BSE034678R4101

6. Click Continue to display the Client Toolkit install screen. This screen lists the components of the Client Toolkit. These components will be installed in the order in which they are listed.

7. Click INSTALL Client Toolkit. This begins the software installation and will install all components from start to finish without any further intervention. This process will take about 5 minutes. The time may vary slightly depending on the performance of the computer.

– The Wizard indicates the component that is currently being installed.

– When the installation is finished, the installed software version is indicated for each component.

8. Click Exit to complete the installation.

Desktop ToolsDesktop Tools support data access for viewing on remote desktops. These services may be installed on all supported operation systems. These applications DO NOT require the Information Management System Services, nor do they require 800xA System software.

Desktop Tools Installation Guidelines

Read the following guidelines carefully before installing the software.

• Upgrades: If upgrading the Desktop Tools from an earlier version, remove all existing Desktop Tools software, including the Microsoft Runtime Components. Use the Add/Remove Programs utility in Control Panel. Install the new software as described in this section.

• Installing User: Install all this software as the Installing User configured in Users and Groups on page 78.

• Readying the Computer for Desktop Tools:

– Install the Windows operating system.

– Clients are connected to the IM Server via TCP/IP. Configure and enable TCP/IP on BOTH the Display server and Display client nodes.

Page 259: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Desktop Tools Installation Guidelines

3BSE034678R4101 259

– Install prerequisite third party software.

– Make a backup of the system before installing Desktop Tools software.

– Exit all Windows applications.

• Hardware: The following hardware is required to support Desktop Tools:

– Intel Pentium CPU, minimum 166 MHz.– Primary Memory: 128 MB.– Disk Space: 100 MB free space.– Minimum 19-inch monitor.

• Prerequisite Software: Table 41 describes the prerequisite software. This software must be installed in the order indicated in the following instructions, and BEFORE installing Desktop Tools. Some prerequisites are provided directly in the InfoMgmt1 directory on 800xA System Installation DVD 1, while others must be installed either via an internet connection, or from the manufacturer’s installation media.

Table 41. Prerequisites for Desktop Tools

Software Description

Operating System Windows 2000 Server with SP4, Windows Server 2003 with SP1, or Windows XP Professional with SP2.

Make a fresh installation of the Windows operating system. Either the NTFS or FAT32 file system may be used.

.NET Framework Refer to .NET Framework on page 87.

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 with Service Pack 1

May be installed via network connection or from the manufacturer’s installation media.

Microsoft Excel Requires manufacturer’s installation media. The Windows 2000, Windows 2003, or Windows XP versions are recommended. Office 97 w/ Service Release 2 may be used; however, this version does not support modify PDL functionality in DataDirect.

Adobe Acrobat Reader and other support software

May be installed before or after Information Management software.

Page 260: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Desktop Tools Installation Section 24 Information Management

260 3BSE034678R4101

• TCP/IP Network Configuration: The Windows operating system and the ABB software require an operational TCP/IP network connection. Typically, the TCP/IP protocol is configured by a network administrator. Consult the network administrator to obtain the proper setting for the TCP/IP protocol, then check the TCP/IP configuration.

The TCP/IP configuration properties are accessible via the Network and Dialup Connections Tool in Control Panel. The path varies depending on the Windows platform. The path for Windows 2000 is described in the following.

1. Launch Control Panel.

2. Select Network and Dialup Connections.

3. In the network and Dialup Connections list, select Local Area Connection.

4. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog, click Properties.

5. In the LAN properties dialog, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.

6. In the TCP/IP properties dialog, check the settings for:

– IP Address.– Subnet Mask.– Default Gateway.

Desktop Tools Installation

To install Desktop Tools:

1. Log in as a Windows user with administrator privileges. Use a domain user with administrator privileges if installing the node on a domain; otherwise, use a locally defined user with administrator privileges.

2. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

Make a backup of the system and applications before installing Information Management software.

Perform all installation and related activities as the SAME user. You may use a domain user with administrator privileges, or a locally-defined user with administrator privileges, depending on whether or not the client resides in a domain.

Page 261: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 24 Information Management Desktop Tools Installation

3BSE034678R4101 261

3. Use Windows Explorer to locate Launch.exe in the following directory:

InfoMgmt1\Autorun

4. Double-click Launch.exe to begin the installation.

5. The Information Management Installation Wizard appears. Click Desktop Tools.

6. The Information Management Prerequisites dialog for Desktop Tools installations appears.

– The Wizard scans the computer to verify that all prerequisites are installed. For installed prerequisites, the wizard indicates the version number. If the version is not current enough to meet the requirements of this installation, the version number is indicated in red; otherwise the version number is indicated in black.

– Prerequisites that are not installed are indicated as Not Found. These must be installed. Prerequisites that are installed, but are out-of-date (indicated in red), must have the proper version installed.

– If all 800xA System installation instructions have been followed, all prerequisites should already be installed. If not, use the links on the Information Management Prerequisites dialog to install them now. When all prerequisites are installed, the Continue function on the Information Management Prerequisites dialog is enabled.

7. Click Continue to display the Desktop Tools install screen. This screen lists the components of Desktop Tools. These components will be installed in the order in which they are listed.

8. Click INSTALL Client Toolkit. This begins the software installation and will install all components from start to finish without any further intervention. This process will take about 5 minutes. The time may vary slightly depending on the performance of the computer.

– The Wizard indicates the component that is currently being installed.

– When the installation is finished, the installed software version is indicated for each component.

9. Click Exit to complete the installation.

Page 262: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Information Management Profiles Client Installation Section 24 Information Management

262 3BSE034678R4101

Information Management Profiles Client InstallationThis application does not require the Information Management System Services or 800xA System software. It is installed on Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

The Profiles Client software is installed via the Information Management Installation Wizard. To install the Profiles Client software:

1. Insert 800xA System Installation DVD 1 into the DVD drive.

2. Use Windows Explorer to locate Launch.exe in the following directory:

InfoMgmt1\Autorun

3. Double-click Launch.exe to begin the installation.

4. The Information Management Installation Wizard appears.

5. Select the Advanced View option (just below Exit).

6. Click Install PROFILES Client.

7. Click Install Now on the Profile Client Installation Wizard. During the installation there is a 5-second opportunity to manually set ACC; otherwise, defaults are used.

8. Click Finish to complete the installation.

Troubleshooting Install ErrorsRefer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Post Installation Setup for installation troubleshooting procedures.

Page 263: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 263

Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software

IntroductionBefore installing the software keys, refer to Section 4, Central Licensing System (CLS) and:

• Install the Central Licensing System (CLS) software on the designated License Server and all License Clients.

• Obtain the machine IDs.

• Apply for and receive the software keys.

Software Key InstallationTo install the software keys, launch the License Entry program from the license server.

1. Select:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Entry

All software keys for 800xA System software must be installed before using the applications. Install the software keys before attempting any post installation procedures, as some procedures may require the software keys to be in place.

Page 264: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Software Key Installation Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software

264 3BSE034678R4101

2. Select:

File > Load/Replace Licenses...

in the License Entry program as shown in Figure 66.

3. The Open dialog appears. Use it to find the license file (.sla), which contains the software keys and click Open.

4. If a software key has already been opened, the Overwrite prompt shown in Figure 67 appears. If necessary, click Yes to install the current software keys.

TC05708A

Figure 66. License Entry Program

TC05710A

Figure 67. Overwrite Prompt

Page 265: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software Troubleshooting

3BSE034678R4101 265

5. When finished, the installed software keys may be viewed via the License Entry program on a License Group basis. For example, Figure 68 shows the software keys installed for the 800xA basic system functions.

6. Select:

File > Exit

to exit the License Entry program when finished.

TroubleshootingSoftware keys are kept in a license file stored in a cache on the hard disk. Basic troubleshooting steps are to locate the license file and view its contents.

TC05711A

Figure 68. Browsing Licenses on a License Group Basis

The most common problem occurs during software key installation if the software keys loaded properly, but are not valid. Refer to Software Key Installation on page 263 to load the software keys.

Page 266: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Locating the License File Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software

266 3BSE034678R4101

Locating the License File

The license file contains the individual software keys. To locate the license file:

1. Launch the License Entry program.

2. Select:

View > File View

3. The expected license file name is displayed at the top level in the tree view.

4. License files are stored in:

Install Drive:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\ABBLicense\Licenses\Cache

Use Windows Explorer to check if the specified directory and file exist.

Unavailable Machine IDs

This section describes what to do if an option is not listed as an available machine ID.

Rainbow Dongles

If the desired Rainbow SentinelSuperPro (parallel port) or Sentinel USB (USB port) dongle is not listed as a machine ID option, verify the following:

1. Verify that the dongle was supplied by ABB. ABB software can read only ABB dongles.

2. Verify that the dongle is attached to the parallel port or USB port. In most cases, ABB software licensing functions support multiple dongles that are daisy chained together on a parallel port or are plugged into multiple USB ports. The dongle for the 800xA System can be anywhere in the daisy chain or in any USB port.

3. Select:

Machine Ids > Available IDs

in the License Entry program to scan for newly inserted IDs.

4. Verify that the Sentinel driver is installed.

Page 267: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software Unavailable Machine IDs

3BSE034678R4101 267

a. The Sentinel driver can be located under System Drivers in the Software Environment category in System Information. The System Information utility can be started by clicking on System Info…from the About box of the Plant Explorer.

-or-

b. Use Windows Explorer to locate setupx86.exe in the following directory.

Install Drive:\Program Files\ABB IndustrialIT\ABBLicense\Spro\WIN_NT

and select:

Functions > Configure Sentinel Driver

A message will appear if the driver is not installed.

c. The installation of the Sentinel driver requires logging in as a member of the Windows Administrators group. There are two methods of installing the driver from the license entry program:

Method 1

Launch the License Entry program and select:

Machine IDs > Install SPro driver

Method 2

Use Windows Explorer to locate setupx86.exe in the followingdirectory.

Install Drive:\Program Files\ABB IndustrialIT\ABBLicense\Spro\WIN_NT

and select:

Functions > Install Sentinel Driver

Page 268: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Assigning Licenses Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software

268 3BSE034678R4101

Ethernet Address

If the Ethernet address is not listed as a machine ID option:

• Verify the TCP/IP protocol was properly configured during the installation of the product being licensed.

• Verify the network adapter is functioning correctly.

Assigning LicensesThe Central Licensing System dynamically distributes the available licenses as they are needed to all the nodes in the 800xA System. However, the License Assignment Editor allows licenses to be permanently assigned to a particular node. To assign a license to a particular node:

1. From the License Server node, select:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing> License Assignment Editor

2. This launches the License Assignment Editor as shown in Figure 69. Enter the name of the node in the Select a Node or Application field. Use the browse button (...) if desired.

3. Click Add. The node name will appear in the Assigned Features field.

4. Select the node name in the Assigned Features field.

5. Select the type of license to be assigned in the Available Licenses field.

6. Enter the number of licenses (of the type selected) that will be assigned to the node in the Number field.

7. Click Assign.

8. Click Save. This will cause the licenses to be allocated as specified.

9. Repeat this procedure as required.

If necessary, licenses will be removed from existing nodes to meet the specified license allocation.

Page 269: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software Backup/Restore

3BSE034678R4101 269

Backup/Restore

License assignments are stored in XML format in the following file:

Install Drive:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\ABBLicense\Licenses\LicenseFeatureAssignment.xml

This file can be copied for backup or replaced with a backed up copy after a re-install of the CLS software. If this file is restored from a backup, reboot the License Server node or restart IIS in order for the change to take effect.

License Assignment Editor Diagnostics

1. To display a complete listing of all the currently assigned licenses and the nodes they are assigned to:

a. From the License Server node, select:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Assignment Editor

b. This launches the License Assignment Editor as shown in Figure 69. Click Diagnostics to view the listing.

2. To create a copy (XML format) of this information:

a. Click Export in the License Assignment Editor.

b. Select the destination directory. The name of the file created will be LicenseEditorDiagnostics.xml.

c. Click OK.

License Status ViewerThere are two uses for the License Status Viewer:

• License Violations on page 271.• Temporary Licenses on page 272.

Uninstalling the CLS software does not remove LicenseFeatureAssignment.xml and reinstalling the CLS software will not overwrite it.

Page 270: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

License Status Viewer Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software

270 3BSE034678R4101

TC03527B

Figure 69. License Assignment Editor

Page 271: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software License Violations

3BSE034678R4101 271

The License Status Viewer (Figure 70) is an application that can be used to diagnose licensing problems. The License Status Viewer is installed with the License Client and is therefore available on every node running the 800xA System software.

To display the License Status Viewer, select:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Status Viewer

License Violations

If license violation messages (Applications are running Without Valid Licenses) appear, use the License Status Viewer to determine which licenses are in violation.

To save this list to a text file:

1. Launch the License Status Viewer by selecting:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Status Viewer

2. Select:

File > Save

3. Enter a file name and browse to the directory in which to save the file.

4. Click Save to save the file.

TC05712A

Figure 70. License Status Viewer

Page 272: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Temporary Licenses Section 25 Licensing 800xA System Software

272 3BSE034678R4101

Temporary Licenses

If temporary license messages appear, (Applications are running with Temporary Licenses. This computer is unable to communicate with the License Server.) use the License Status Viewer to determine the connection status of the CLS server. The CLS connection status is listed at the bottom of the License Status Viewer. A typical problem is that the License Client is not pointing to the node running the License Server. If this occurs, refer to CLS Relocation Tool on page 272.

CLS Relocation Tool

If the License Client is not pointing to the correct License Server node, or the License Server has been relocated or renamed, change it by using the License Status Viewer:

1. Launch the License Status Viewer by selecting:

Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > Licensing > License Status Viewer

2. Select:

Tools > Change CLS Machine

3. The Central License Server Machine Selection dialog appears (Figure 71). Enter or browse for the node running the License Server.

4. Click Apply to save the change.

5. Click Exit to return to the License Status Viewer.

6. Shut down and restart the node to apply the change.

TC05713A

Figure 71. CLS Relocation Tool

Page 273: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 273

Appendix A Third Party Software

Introduction

This appendix details the third party software that has been evaluated for use with the 800xA System. The 800xA System has been found to be fully compatible and functional with this software as of the date of this document. Refer to ABB Solutions Bank for an up to date, comprehensive listing of all software that has been evaluated including service patches and hot fixes released following the 800xA System release. The complete list of software can be found at:

http://solutionsbank.us.abb.com/

Table 42 lists the Microsoft Windows operating system software. Table 43 lists the other Microsoft software programs that have been determined as needed to properly run and interface with 800xA System software. The tables also detail the service packs and hot fixes that the 800xA System software has been found to be compatible with.

Table 44 lists other third party programs that may be needed with the various 800xA System software packages.

Some of the software is included with the 800xA installation DVDs. In all cases, the affect of any software should be determined for each installation particularly where there may be interfaces external to the 800xA System.

Some third party software may offer a web browser popup blocker. Do not use them with the thin client portions of the integrated applications (specifically Asset Optimization), since these applications open child window browsers to display application data for the user. If a popup blocker is being used on a web browser, disable it during use of these web based applications.

Unless otherwise indicated, Microsoft service packs and hot fixes are not included with 800xA System software. They can be downloaded from:

www.microsoft.com

Page 274: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Introduction Appendix A Third Party Software

274 3BSE034678R4101

Table 42. Microsoft Operating System Software

Software VersionService

PackHot Fixes How Supplied

Windows Server 2003

1.0 SP1 MS05-033 MS05-027 Vendor supplied.

MS05-032 MS05-026

MS05-031 MS05-025

Windows 2000 Server

1.0 SP4 MS05-032 MS04-044 Vendor supplied.

MS05-031 MS04-043

MS05-030 MS04-041

MS05-027 MS04-037

MS05-026 MS04-036

MS05-025 MS04-032

MS05-024 MS04-031

MS05-019 MS04-022

MS05-018 MS04-020

MS05-017 MS04-019

MS05-016 MS04-016

MS05-015 MS04-014

MS05-013 MS04-012

MS05-012 MS04-011

MS05-011 MS03-049

MS05-010 MS03-043

MS05-009 MS03-042

MS05-004 MS03-041

MS05-003 MS03-023

MS04-045 —

Q8252371 KB817478 Included with 800xA.

Page 275: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix A Third Party Software Introduction

3BSE034678R4101 275

Windows XP Professional

1.0 SP2 MS05-033 MS05-015 Vendor supplied.

MS05-032 MS05-013

MS05-031 MS05-012

MS05-027 MS05-011

MS05-026 MS05-009

MS05-025 MS05-007

MS05-020 MS05-001

MS05-020 MS04-044

MS05-019 MS04-043

MS05-018 MS04-041

MS05-016

NOTE:1. Q825237 was replaced by KB835517. Either one can be used.

Table 43. Microsoft Software

Software VersionService

PackHot Fixes How Supplied

.Net Framework 1.0 SP3 MS05-004 Software and Service Packs Included with 800xA. Hot fixes are vendor supplied..Net Framework 1.1 SP1 MS05-004

DirectX 9.0c Installed by Windows XP Professional SP2 and Windows Server 2003 SP1. Included with 800xA and manually installed for Windows 2000 Server.

Table 42. Microsoft Operating System Software (Continued)

Software VersionService

PackHot Fixes How Supplied

Page 276: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Introduction Appendix A Third Party Software

276 3BSE034678R4101

Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 MS04-028 Internet Explorer 6.0 with SP1 Installed as part of Windows XP Professional SP2 and Windows Server 2003. Included with 800xA and manually installed for Windows 2000 Server.

Internet Information Server 5.0 Part of Windows XP and Windows 2000 Server.

Internet Information Server 6.0 Part of Windows Server 2003.

MDAC 2.8 MS04-003 Included with 800xA and manually installed for Windows 2000 Server.

2.8 SP1 Included and installed with Windows XP Professional SP2

2.8 SP2 Included and installed with Windows Server 2003 SP1

MSDE - 2000 SP3a Q823490

MS03-031

Included and installed when Engineering Studio is selected; otherwise, vendor supplied. Q823490 included with 800xA. MS03-031 vendor supplied.

MSMQ 5.0.720 Part of Windows Operating Systems.

MSSOAP1 DLL Version

1.2.814.0

Included and installed with 800xA

MSXML (Windows 2000 Server SP4)

3.0 SP4 Included with 800xA.

Table 43. Microsoft Software (Continued)

Software VersionService

PackHot Fixes How Supplied

Page 277: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix A Third Party Software Introduction

3BSE034678R4101 277

MSXML (Windows XP Professional SP2)

3.0 SP5 Vendor supplied.

MSXML (Windows Server 2003 SP1)

3.0 SP7 Vendor supplied.

MSXML 4.0 SP2 Included with 800xA.

Office 2003 - Excel 1.0 SP1 MS05-023

MS05-012

KB841532

Vendor supplied.

Office 2003 - Word

Office 2003 - FrontPage 1.0 MS05-023

MS05-012

KB841532

Office XP - Excel 2002 1.0 SP3 MS05-023

MS05-012

Vendor supplied.

Office XP - Word 2002 MS05-005

MS04-027

SNMP driver Automatically installed with Windows Operating Systems; however, it must be enabled. The Windows CD will be required for Windows 2000 Server.

WMI-SNMP Provider 1.50.1085.5 Included and installed with 800xA.

Table 43. Microsoft Software (Continued)

Software VersionService

PackHot Fixes How Supplied

Page 278: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Introduction Appendix A Third Party Software

278 3BSE034678R4101

SQL Server 2000 - Personal

SP3a MS03-031 Included with 800xA

SQL Server 2000 - Standard

SQL Server 2000 - Standard Client

Visual BASIC Professional 6.0 SP6 Visual BASIC Professional software purchased separately using 800xA price list or from another vendor. SP6 included with 800xA.

Visual BASIC Runtime DLL

6.0.97.86 Included and installed with 800xA.

Visual C7

Runtime DLL

7.00.9466.0

Windows Installer 2.0 Part of Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 Operating Systems. Will only exist on a node if it is an upgrade.

Windows Installer 3.0 Part of Windows XP Professional SP2.

Windows Installer 3.1 Part of Windows Server 2003 SP1.

Table 44. Other Third Party Software

Software Version How Supplied

ADO 2.8 Vendor supplied.

Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0 Included with 800xA

Table 43. Microsoft Software (Continued)

Software VersionService

PackHot Fixes How Supplied

Page 279: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix A Third Party Software Introduction

3BSE034678R4101 279

amLite 1.1.1.0 Included and installed by 800xA.

ASP.NET Vendor supplied.

AutoCAD 2002

2000i

Vendor supplied.

Autodesk VoloView Express > 2.01 Included with 800xA

Citrix MetaFrame Presentation Server, Standard Edition

Vendor supplied.

Crystal Report1 8.5, 9.0, and 10.0

DMS Server and Client 2.2 Purchased separately using 800xA price list (3BSE037962) if DMS Calibration Integration functionality is selected.

Forehelp Premier 2001 5.0.2a Included and installed by 800xA.

Intergraph INtools 6.0 Purchased separately and installed on non-800xA node if Process Engineering Tool Integration is selected.

Intergraph SmartPlant Instrumentation 7.0

Matrikon OPC Server for IEC 60870 1.0.0.103 Included and installed by 800xA.

Maximo SDK for Business Components 4.1, 4.11, 5.1 Purchased separately from MRO Software, Inc. if Maximo Integration functionality is selected.Maximo Server 4.1, 4.11, 5.1

OPC DA Auto 2.02 Merge Module 5.00 2.00.2.20 Included and installed by 800xA.

OPC Core Components 2.00 2.00.2.20

Oracle 9i Included with 800xA.

8 Client 2

Table 44. Other Third Party Software (Continued)

Software Version How Supplied

Page 280: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Introduction Appendix A Third Party Software

280 3BSE034678R4101

SAP/PM 4.7 Purchased separately from SAP, AG if SAP/PM Integration functionality is selected.

Sentinel System Driver (Dongle) 5.41.0 Included and installed with 800xA.

Sun JRE 1.4.2-08 Vendor supplied. Required when Maximo Integration is used with Asset Optimization.

Symbol Factory ActiveX Library 2.0 (bld 140) Included and installed with 800xA.

Sysinternal - Handle.exe Included and installed with 800xA.

SysInternal - ListDLLs.exe

SysInternal - PSList.exe

NOTES:1. PPA OLE/DB Provider will only work with Crystal Report Version 8.5. IM will work with either Crystal Report

Version 9.0 or 10.0.2. Oracle 8 Client software is required if the IM Server (Version 4.1) will interact with History Services on a

Unix-based Enterprise Historian 2.2/n server. This is because Enterprise Historian is based on Oracle 7, and Oracle 9 can not communicate directly with Oracle 7. If required, the Oracle 8 Client must be installed before Oracle 9. Oracle 8 can not be installed after Oracle 9. Therefore, if there is any intention of using the Oracle 8 Client, install it before Oracle 9.

Table 44. Other Third Party Software (Continued)

Software Version How Supplied

Page 281: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 281

Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups

IntroductionA Workgroup System should not consist of more than a combined Aspect and Connectivity Server, separate Application Servers, and five or six clients. A Workgroup becomes increasingly difficult to administrate as the number of users and computers grows. Workgroup should therefore be considered only for systems with a small number of nodes and with few users.

Preparation and ConfigurationThe following is a short description for the preparation and configuration of the System Software User Settings during installation of Process Portal A in a Windows Workgroup environment.

1. As local administrator, set up all machines as members of a Workgroup.

a. Select:

Start

and right-click on

My Computer

b. Select Properties from the context menu that appears.

c. Select the Computer Name tab.

This procedure applies to Windows XP operating systems. Adapt the procedure accordingly for other supported Windows operating systems

Page 282: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Preparation and Configuration Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups

282 3BSE034678R4101

d. Click Change to open the Computer Name Changes dialog shown in Figure 72.

e. Type the computer name in the Computer name field.

f. Select Workgroup in the Member of frame and give the workgroup a name.

g. Click OK.

2. Restart all nodes.

3. Log in as local administrator and install the Process Portal A software on all the nodes that are members of the Workgroup.

Figure 72. Computer Name Changes Dialog

Page 283: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups Troubleshooting

3BSE034678R4101 283

4. When the installation has reached the System Software User Settings dialog, configure it according to Figure 73. Use the local machine name as domain name.

5. The IndustrialITAdmin, IndustrialITUser groups and a Service Account will be created.

6. Add users and user groups in Windows, according to the requirements of the system. Make sure that the set of users and user groups includes passwords (empty passwords are not allowed) and that they are identical on every node in the workgroup.

7. For recommended user groups, refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Administration and Security.

TroubleshootingThe following are troubleshooting tools to use in case problems occur when using Windows workgroups.

Figure 73. System Software User Settings Dialog

Page 284: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Problem with Hostname Lookup Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups

284 3BSE034678R4101

Problem with Hostname Lookup

There may be a problem with getting the IP address for other hosts at boot time or when the primary connection of a redundant network fails. As a workaround to this problem, enter the addresses into the hostfile:

Install Drive:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts

for all hosts. Figure 74 shows an example of the hosts file with the addresses entered.

Failure to add Client or Server to the 800xA System

If there is a problem with adding a node when configuring the 800xA System and the node is using Windows XP, disable Simple File Sharing.

1. Select:

Start > Control Panel > Folder Options

Figure 74. Hosts File

Page 285: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups Failure to add Client or Server to the 800xA System

3BSE034678R4101 285

2. The Folder Options dialog appears. Select the View tab and configure it according to Figure 75. Be sure the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check box is disabled.

Figure 75. Folder Options Dialog - View Tab

Page 286: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Log Over Fails Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups

286 3BSE034678R4101

Log Over Fails

If an Invalid User ID occurs when using the Change User dialog, the reason could be the machine name was not typed before the user name. During some conditions it is necessary to give the full name of the user in the form:

Machine name\Username

as shown in Figure 76.

Invalid Account Encountered During System Software User Settings

Under some conditions the default DCOM Security might not be properly set. It is then necessary to set it manually.

1. For Windows XP Professional and Server 2003, select:

Start > Run

2. Type dcomcnfg in the Open field and click OK, Yes, and Yes.

3. For Windows 2000 Server, select:

Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Component Services

Figure 76. Change User Dialog

The machine name is the name of the node on which the 800xA user was created. For convenience, always do the association from the same node and note on which node it was done.

Page 287: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups HTTP 500 - Internal Server Error Message

3BSE034678R4101 287

4. Expand the tree in the left from to:

Component Services > Computers

5. Right-click My Computer in the right frame and select Properties from the context menu that appears.

6. Select the Default Security tab.

7. Click Edit Default in the Access Permissions frame.

8. Give the IndustrialITAdmin and IndutrialITUser access permissions.

9. Click OK.

10. Click Edit Default in the Launch Permissions frame.

11. Give the IndustrialITAdmin and the IndustrialITUser launch permissions.

12. Click OK.

13. Click Apply and then OK.

HTTP 500 - Internal Server Error Message

The following error message may appear in the Web Browser window when trying to view an ASP page after installing Microsoft Visual Studio 6.0 SP6:

HTTP 500 - Internal server error

Additionally, the following warning message may be logged in the system event log:

The server failed to load application '/LM/W3SVC/1/ROOT'. The error was 'General access denied error'.

To resolve this problem, grant the IWAM_ComputerName user account the Read and Execute permission for the Mfc42.dll file. The Mfc42.dll file is located in the following folder:

%WINDIR%\System32

To grant the Read & Execute permission, follow these steps:

1. Use Windows Explorer to locate Mfc42.dll.

2. Right-click the Mfc42.dll file and select Properties from the context menu that appears. The Properties dialog appears.

Page 288: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

HTTP 500 - Internal Server Error Message Appendix B 800xA and Workgroups

288 3BSE034678R4101

3. Click the Security tab, and then click Add. The Select Users or Groups dialog appears.

4. In the Name field, locate and then click IWAM_ComputerName.

5. Click Add, and then OK.

6. Make sure that the Allow check box is selected for the Read and Execute permission, and then click OK.

Page 289: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 289

Appendix C Users, Groups, and RightsAssignments

IntroductionThis appendix defines the default User Groups and Users for the 800xA System.

Workgroups set up the same groups and users as a domain. The user rights are also the same as in a domain, except all domain policies must be defined on each local node. No additional policies are required for workgroups.

User Groups and Users

Table 45 lists the default User Groups and Users.

All users must be members of the IndustrialITUser group if they require the ability to start a workplace in Process Portal.

Table 45. Default User Groups and Users

Organizational Unit

User Group User Account Description

Industrial IT IndustrialITAdmin 800xAService 800xA System service account

800xAInstaller 800xA System installer account

Administrator System installer default account

Customer Admin Additional customer administrators

Page 290: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Local Groups and Members on Each Node Appendix C Users, Groups, and Rights Assignments

290 3BSE034678R4101

Local Groups and Members on Each NodeTable 46 lists the local and domain User Groups and Users for each system node.

Industrial IT (continued)

IndustrialITUser 800xAService 800xA System service account

800xAInstaller 800xA System installer account

ApplicationEngineer Default application engineer

SystemEngineer Default system engineer

Operator Default operator 1

Operator2 Default operator 2

Administrator System installer default account

Customer Users Additional customer users

Table 46. Local Groups and Members on Each Node in System

Local Group/User Domain Group/USer

Administrators (standard default) 800xAService

800xAInstaller

ocshis (IM server node only)

HarmonyService (Harmony server node only)

MelodyServer (Melody server node only)

HistoryAdmin (IM Server node only) ocshis (Historian Information Management service account)

ORA_DBA (IM Server node only) 800xAService

800xAInstaller

ocshis

Table 45. Default User Groups and Users (Continued)

Organizational Unit

User Group User Account Description

Page 291: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix C Users, Groups, and Rights Assignments User Assignment Rights

3BSE034678R4101 291

User Assignment RightsTable 47 lists the user assignment rights.

Table 47. User Rights Assignments

Policy Security Setting

Domain Security Policy

None defined

Domain Controller Security Policy

None defined

Local Security Policy (each node)

Access this computer from the network IndustrialITAdmin

IndustrialITUser

Allow log on locally (Windows Server 2003) IndustrialITAdmin

Change system time IndustrialITAdmin

Log on as batch job 800xAService

800xAInstaller

ocshis (IM Server node only)

Log on as service 800xAService

800xAInstaller

ocshis (IM Server node only)

Log on locally (Windows XP) IndustrialITAdmin

Impersonate a client after authentication SERVICE (Default)

Administrators (Default)

Users that require logover (PPA)

Page 292: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

User Assignment Rights Appendix C Users, Groups, and Rights Assignments

292 3BSE034678R4101

Additional Local Security Policies on Batch Server

Act as part of operating system 800xAService

Adjust memory quotas for a process

Bypass traverse checking

Replace a process level token

Additional Local Security Policies for Harmony/Melody Servers

Act as part of operating system HarmonyService or MelodyService

Generate security audits

Impersonate a Client after Authentication

Log on as Service

Table 47. User Rights Assignments (Continued)

Policy Security Setting

Page 293: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 293

Appendix D Installation Media

Table 48 provides a summary of the DVD installation media for the Industrial IT 800xA System.

DVD is the recommended installation media type (there are also two CDs included with the DVDs). If all CDs are ordered instead, the DVD directory indicated in Table 48 is included on its own CD.

Table 48. 800xA System Installation Media

CD or DVD Directory Software

800xA System Installation (CD)

— Industrial IT 800xA System Installer (refer to Industrial IT, 800xA - System, Automated Installation)

Release Notes, Documentation (CD)

— System and Functional Area Release Notes and Instructions1

800xA System Installation DVD 1

AssetOpt • Asset Optimization• PC, Network and Software Monitoring• SMS and e-mail Messaging

Connects1 • 800xA for Advant Master• 800xA for Melody• PLC Connect• 800xA for SafeGuard

Connects2 • 800xA for DCI• 800xA for Harmony• 800xA for MOD 300• 800xA for TRIO

DevMgmt1 PROFIBUS Device Integration

DevMgmt2 • HART Device Integration• HART Multiplexer Connect

DevMgmt3 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration

Page 294: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix D Installation Media

294 3BSE034678R4101

800xA System Installation DVD 1 (continued)

Documentation1 800xA System and Functional Area Documentation Installation Kit

Engineering • Engineering Platform• Function Designer• Reuse Assistant• Script Manager• Topology Designer

InfoMgmt1 • Inform IT - History Services• Scheduler• Desktop Trends• DataDirect• Display Services• System Services• Open Data Access• Calculations

ProdMgmt • Batch Management• Manufacturing Management

ProEngToolInt • Process Engineering Tool Integration for INtools.

System1 • License Entry Program• Central License Service• License Client Component• Calculations• SoftPoint Server• Application Scheduler• Data Direct• Diagnostics Collection Tool• Third party software

System2 • Process Portal• RNRP• Aspect Express• Aspect Studio• Legacy Graphics Library

Table 48. 800xA System Installation Media (Continued)

CD or DVD Directory Software

Page 295: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix D Installation Media

3BSE034678R4101 295

800xA System Installation DVD 1 (continued)

System3 • AC 800M Connect• Control Builder M• OPC Server for AC 800M• Base Software for SoftControl

System4 • Firmware for AC 800M

800xA System Installation DVD 2

InfoMgmt2 • Oracle 9• Oracle 8 Client

System5 SQL Server 2000 Standard with Service Packs

System6 SQL Server 2000 Personal with Service Packs

NOTE:1. The 800xA System and Functional Area Release Notes and instructions are included on the Release Notes,

Documentation CD for access before installing the 800xA System software. The Documentation folder on 800xA System Installation DVD 1 (or the Documentation CD if CDs are ordered) includes the installation kit for installing the 800xA System and Functional Area instructions.

Table 48. 800xA System Installation Media (Continued)

CD or DVD Directory Software

Page 296: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Appendix D Installation Media

296 3BSE034678R4101

Page 297: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101 297

Symbols.NET framework 87

Numerics800xA for Advant Master 153800xA for DCI 159

ECCP Ethernet controller board 159800xA for Harmony 163800xA for Melody 179800xA for MOD 300 203800xA for SafeGuard 213800xA for TRIO 53

AAbout this book 17AC 800M 131

AC 800M Connect 131Control Builder M 132OPC Server for AC 800M 134SoftControl 136

AC 800M Connect 131Acrobat Reader 99Adding 800xA domain users 84Adding nodes to domain 82Application Scheduler 122Application server 30Aspect server 30Asset Optimization 227Automatic updates 67

BBackup software 105Basic node types 30Basic system functions 119Batch Management 241

CCalculations 122Caution icon 19Client Toolkit 256CLS installation 107

Client 114Server setup 107, 109System extension 115

Combined node types 32Configuration rules 33

Engineering systems 36Generic 33Optimized 35

Control Builder M 132

DDataDirect 122DCI network services 161

Group number 161Node number 161

Default user groups and users 289Diagnostics Collection Tool 127DirectX 86Disks and file system 62Display and Client Services 258DNS server 74Document conventions 20Document Manager

AutoCAD integration 225Documentation 21, 125Domain controller 74Domain controller and DNS 30Domains 34

EECCP Ethernet controller board 159Enable SNMP service 88

INDEX

Page 298: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Index

298 3BSE034678R4101

Index

298 3BSE034678R4101

Energy saver 67Engineering Platform 219Engineering Studio 215Engineering systems 36Ethernet address 112Excel 89

FFile system 62FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration 137FrontPage 90Function Designer 222

GGeneric configuration rules 33Groups 78

HHART Device Integration 145Hot fixes 24Hyperthreading 68

IIcons 19IE enhanced security configuration 68IForm Developer 245IIS 69, 70Information icon 19Information Management 247Information management consolidation 32Installation 123, 127

800xA for Advant Master 153800xA for DCI 159

ECCP Ethernet controller board 159800xA for Harmony 163800xA for Melody 179800xA for MOD 300 203800xA for SafeGuard 213AC 800M 131, 132, 134, 136Asset Optimization 227

CLS 107CLS Server setup 107, 109CLS system extension 115Diagnostics Collection Tool 127Documentation 125Engineering Studio 215

Additional configurations 224Document Manager

AutoCAD integration 225Engineering Platform 219Function Designer 222Reuse Assistant 223Script Manager 223SQL Server Desktop Engine 218Topology Designer 221

Excel Data Access (DataDirect) 122FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Integration

137General 53

Application server 30Aspect server 30Domain controller and DNS 30Information management consolidation 32Installation media 293Licensing and post installation 60Remote client server 31

HART Device Integration 145Information Management 247License client 114PC, Network and Software Monitoring 234

Network Device and Scanning Tool 237Network Monitor 237

PLC Connect 211Prerequisites 61

.Net framework 87Acrobat Reader 99Adding 800xA domain users 84Adding nodes to domain 82Backup software 105DirectX 86

Page 299: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Index

3BSE034678R4101 299

Domain controller and DNS server 74Enable SNMP service 88IIS 69Internet Explorer 85MDAC 98Microsoft Excel 89Microsoft FrontPage 90Microsoft Word 89Miscellaneous Windows setup 66MSXML 91Network adapters 72Remote client 99SQL Server 92SQL Server SP3a 97Users and groups 78Virus scan software 106Visual BASIC 90Windows 62Windows installation guidelines 63Windows service pack 71

Process Portal 119Production Management 241

Batch Management 241Manufacturing Management 243

PROFIBUS Device Integration 149RNRP 117SMS and e-mail Messaging 129Workgroups 281

Installation data 26Installation media 293Installation planning 23

Hot fixes 24New installations 23, 24Planning and preparation 26

Installation data 26System overview 28

Basic node types 30Combined node types 32Configuration rules 33Domains and workgroups 34Engineering systems 36

Generic configuration rules 33Node types 30Optimized system configurations 35System configuration 36

Upgrades 24Intended user 19Internet explorer 85

LLicensing 60Local security policy 68

MMachine ID 110Manufacturing Management 243Maximo integration 228MDAC 98Microsoft Excel 89Microsoft FrontPage 90Microsoft software 275Microsoft Word 89Minimum hardware requirements 24, 55MOD 300 System 203MSXML 91

NNetwork adapters 72New installations 18, 23, 24Node types 30

Basic 30Combined 32

OOPC Server for AC 800M 134Operating system software 274Optimized system configurations 35Oracle 251Other third party software 278

PPC client applications 258

Page 300: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

Index

300 3BSE034678R4101

Index

300 3BSE034678R4101

PC, Network and Software Monitoring 234Network Device and Scanning Tool 237Network Monitor 237

PCI-type Realtime Accelerator Board 205Planning and preparation 26

Installation data 26PLC Connect 211Popup blocker 67Post installation 60prerequisite software

server 259Process Portal 119Product

Overview 159Product versions 17Production Management 241

Batch Management 241Manufacturing Management 243

PROFIBUS Device Integration 149

RRemote client 99Remote client server 31Reuse Assistant 223RNRP 117

SScript Manager 223SMS and e-mail Messaging 129SoftControl 136SoftPoint Server 123Software Installation 214Software keys 113Specifications 21SQL Server 92

SP3a 97SQL Server Desktop Engine 218

Security patch 224Supported products 127System checker 23System configurations 36System installer 19

System level tasksIIS setup 70

System overview 28Basic node types 30Combined node types 32Configuration rules 33Domains and workgroups 34Engineering systems 36Generic configuration rules 33Node types 30Optimized system configurations 35System configurations 36

TThird party software 25, 273

Microsoft 275Operating system 274Other 278

Tip icon 19Topology Designer 221

UUpgrades 19, 24User groups and users

Default 289Users 78

VVirtual memory 66Virus scan software 106Visual BASIC 90

WWarning icon 19Windows firewall 67Windows operating system 62

Installation guidelines 63Miscellaneous setup 66

Windows service pack 71Word 89Workgroups 34, 281

Page 301: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...
Page 302: Industrial 800xA - System 800xA Sy… ·  · 2011-11-25800xA for Melody Version 4.1 Installation .....200 Section 18 - 800xA for MOD 300 Introduction ...

3BSE034678R4101. Printed in Sweden June 2005Copyright © 2003-2005 by ABB. All Rights Reserved® Registered Trademark of ABB.™ Trademark of ABB.

Automation Technology ProductsMannheim, Germanywww.abb.de/controlsystems

Automation Technology Products Wickliffe, Ohio, USAwww.abb.com/controlsystems

Automation Technology ProductsVästerås, Swedenwww.abb.com/controlsystems

http://www.abb.com